Lexus RX450h Owners Book

* The preview only show first 10 pages of manuals. Please download to view the full documents.

Loading preview... Please wait.

Manuals information


Report / DMCA this file

Manuals Content

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

Before driving

Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column

2

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information

3

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience

4

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information

5

When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident

6

Vehicle specifications

Detailed vehicle information

7

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

Index

Before driving

1-1. Hybrid system Hybrid system................................... 26 Hybrid system precautions ......... 29 Energy monitor/ consumption screen ................... 34 Hybrid vehicle driving tips........... 39 1-2. Key information Keys ....................................................... 41 1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors Smart access system with push-button start .......................... 46 Wireless remote control .............. 57 Side doors ........................................... 61 Back door........................................... 64 1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats.......................................... 75 Rear seats.......................................... 80 Driving position memory ............. 84 Head restraints................................. 87 Seat belts ........................................... 89

2

Steering wheel.................................. 97 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ................................................ 99 Outside rear view mirrors......... 100 1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows.............................. 103 Moon roof ........................................ 106 1-6. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap.......... 110 1-7. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system ........................ 115 Alarm.................................................... 117 Theft prevention labels ................. 119 1-8. Safety information Correct driving posture ............. 120 SRS airbags ..................................... 122 Front passenger occupant classification system.................. 134 Child restraint systems ............... 139 Installing child restraints............. 143

2

When driving

2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle........................ 156 Power (ignition) switch ............... 166 Hybrid transmission ....................... 171 Turn signal lever ............................ 179 Parking brake ................................. 180 Horn..................................................... 181 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters ..................... 182 Indicators and warning lights................................................. 185 Multi-information display........... 189 Head-up display ............................ 195 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch.......................... 200 Automatic High Beam.............. 205 Fog light switch ................................ 211 Windshield wipers and washer............................................. 213 Rear window wiper and washer............................................. 218 Headlight cleaner switch ........... 219

2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control ............................... 220 Dynamic radar cruise control............................................ 224 1 Intuitive parking assist ................ 235 Electronically modulated air suspension ............................. 242 Rear view monitor system 2 (rear view mirror-attached type)................................................ 248 Driving assist systems................. 252 Hill-start assist control .............. 258 3 Pre-Collision System.................. 260 2-5. Driving information Utility vehicle precautions........ 264 4 Cargo and luggage..................... 269 Vehicle load limits........................ 273 Winter driving tips ....................... 274 5 Trailer towing (AWD models with towing package) .............. 278 Trailer towing (2WD models and AWD models without towing package)......................... 291 6 Dinghy towing ............................... 292

7

3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

Index

Interior features

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system ............................................ 296 Rear window defogger switch............................................. 303 Windshield wiper de-icer........ 304 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system ................................ 305 Using the radio............................. 309 Using the CD player.................... 319 Playing MP3 and WMA discs.................................. 329 Operating an iPod® player.... 339 Operating a USB memory player ................ 347 Optimal use of the audio system............................... 356 Using the AUX adapter........... 359 Using the steering wheel audio switches ............................. 361

4

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio system ......... 364 Using the Bluetooth® audio system................................ 367 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player......... 372 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player......... 376 Bluetooth® audio system setup .............................................. 383 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Hands-free system for mobile phones........................... 384 Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)................. 388 Making a phone call.................... 396 Setting a mobile phone............... 401 Security and system setup........ 407 Using the phone book................... 411

3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list............................. 418 • Interior lights ................................ 419 • Personal lights ............................. 419 3-6. Using the storage features List of storage features................ 421 • Glove box .................................... 422 • Bottle holders/ door pockets............................... 423 • Cup holders................................. 424 • Console box................................ 426 • Auxiliary boxes........................... 428 • Under tray.................................... 429 3-7. Other interior features Sun visors........................................ 430 Vanity mirrors................................. 431 Clock................................................. 432 Outside temperature display (vehicles without a navigation system).................... 433 Multi-display light control (vehicles without a navigation system).................... 434 Power outlets................................. 435 Seat heaters and ventilators.................................... 438 Armrest ............................................ 440 Coat hooks ...................................... 441 Floor mat.......................................... 442 Luggage compartment features.......................................... 443 Garage door opener.................. 447 Compass.......................................... 453

4

Maintenance and care

4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.................. 458 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior..................... 461

1

2

4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements ..... 464 General maintenance................ 466 3 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ...................................... 470 4

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions.................................... 471 Hood ................................................. 474 5 Positioning a floor jack............... 475 Engine compartment.................. 477 12-volt battery............................... 489 Tires ................................................... 496 6 Tire inflation pressure................ 505 Wheels .............................................. 510 Air conditioning filter................... 512 7 Electronic key battery................. 515 Checking and replacing fuses................................................. 517 Headlight aim ................................ 533 Light bulbs....................................... 536 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5

Index

When trouble arises

5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers.................... 556 If your vehicle needs to be towed ....................................... 557 If you think something is wrong ........................................ 563 Event data recorder.................... 564

6

6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 628 Fuel information........................... 640 Tire information............................. 643 6-2. Customization Customizable features............... 656

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ...... 566 If a warning message is displayed....................................... 575 If you have a flat tire.................... 596 If the hybrid system will not start........................................... 610 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............................... 612 If you lose your keys ..................... 613 If the electronic key does not operate properly ................ 614 If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged ................................ 617 If your vehicle overheats .......... 620 If the vehicle becomes stuck................................................ 625

6

Vehicle specifications

6-3. Initialization Items to initialize ........................... 665 7

For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.......................... 668 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).................................... 669

Index Abbreviation list ................................... 674

1

Alphabetical index............................... 676 What to do if... ...................................... 686

2

3

4

5

6

7

7

Pictorial index

Exterior

Windshield wipers P. 213 Moon roof  P. 106 Parking lights P. 200 Hood P. 474

Outside rear view mirrors P. 100

Turn signal lights P. 179 Side marker lights P. 200 Fog lights P. 211 Headlights P. 200 8

Rear window defogger P. 303

Rear window wiper P. 218

Fuel filler door P. 110 Side doors

Back door P. 64

P. 61

Tires ●Rotation ●Replacement ●Inflation pressure ●Information

Tail lights P. 200

Back door opener P. 496 P. 596 P. 637 P. 643

P. 64

Side marker lights P. 200 Turn signal lights P. 179

: If equipped 9

Pictorial index

Interior

Front SRS side airbags P. 122 Seat belts P. 89 Head restraints P. 87 Power window switches

Door pockets P. 423 Bottle holders P. 423 Front seats P. 75 SRS driver airbag

P. 103

Rear seats P. 80

P. 122

SRS knee airbags P. 122

A

Armrest P. 440 Auxiliary boxes  P. 421 Rear SRS side airbags P. 122 Cup holders P. 424 Power outlet P. 435 10

SRS front passenger airbag P. 122 Console box Power outlet AUX adapter USB adapter 

P. 426 P. 435 P. 359 P. 347

A Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 99 Rear view monitor system  P. 248 Compass P. 453 Auxiliary box P. 428 Interior lights P. 419 Personal lights P. 419

Interior lights P. 419 Personal lights P. 419

SRS curtain shield airbags P. 122

Coat hooks P. 441 Moon roof switches  P. 106 Garage door opener buttons P. 447 Sun visors P. 430 Vanity mirrors P. 431

: If equipped 11

Pictorial index

Interior

B Inside lock buttons

P. 61

Driving position memory switches  P. 84

Outside rear view mirror switches P. 100

Door lock switches

P. 61

Window lock switch P. 103

Power window switches P. 103

12

C

Hybrid transmission shift lever P. 171 Shift lock override button P. 612 Remote Touch*1 Cup holders P. 424

Floor mat P. 442 VSC off switch P. 252 Seat heater switches / Seat heater and ventilator switches  P. 438

: If equipped *1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 13

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Headlight switch P. 200 Turn signal lever P. 179 Fog light switch P. 211

Glove box P. 422 Power back door main switch  P. 64

Gauges and meters P. 182 Multi-information display P. 189 Horn P. 181

Power (ignition) switch P. 166 Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 213 Rear window wiper and washer switch P. 218 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch Hood lock release lever P. 474

14

P. 97

Parking brake pedal P. 180

A

With navigation system

Navigation system*1

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch*1 Emergency flasher switch P. 556

Air conditioning system*1

Audio system*1

Security indicator P. 115, 117

Without navigation system Emergency flasher switch P. 556

Multi display ●Display light control P. 434

●Outside temperature display P. 433 ●Clock P. 432

Air conditioning system P. 296

●Air conditioning display P. 296 ●Audio display P. 305 Audio system

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch P. 303

P. 305

Security indicator P. 115, 117

: If equipped *1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 15

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

B Audio remote control switches P. 361

*

2

Telephone switch P. 389 Talk switch  P. 389 *2

*2

Multi-information switches P. 189

Side camera switch*1

Distance switch  P. 224 Cruise control switch P. 220, 224

C Head-up display main switch  P. 195 Display contrast adjustment switch  P. 195 Display position adjustment switch  P. 195 Power outlet main switch  P. 435

16

D

Height control off switch  P. 242

Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 505

E

Cup holders P. 424 Headlight cleaner switch  P. 219 Power back door switch  P. 64

ODO/TRIP button P. 183 Instrument panel light control switches P. 183 Fuel filler door opener P. 110 Height selector switch  P. 242 Windshield wiper de-icer switch  P. 304

*2

: If equipped *12: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. * : For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 17

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

Power outlet P. 435

Luggage cover P. 443

Cargo hooks P. 443

18

Cargo hooks P. 443

A

Power back door switch  P. 64

B

Luggage compartment light P. 67 Rear seatback lock release lever P. 80

Height selector switch  P. 242

: If equipped 19

For your information Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

20

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the hybrid system, multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding. Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

21

CAUTION ■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

22

CAUTION ■ Dispose of the hybrid battery (traction battery)

If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event of that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, they may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

23

Symbols used throughout this manual Cautions & Notices CAUTION This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.

Symbols used in illustrations Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.” Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

24

Before driving 1-1. Hybrid system

1

Hybrid system ............................ 26

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror............................... 99

Hybrid system precautions .... 29

Outside rear view mirrors.... 100

Energy monitor/ consumption screen.............. 34 Hybrid vehicle driving tips...... 39

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows........................ 103

1-2. Key information

Moon roof ................................. 106

Keys................................................ 41 1-6. Refueling 1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors Smart access system with push-button start.................... 46

Opening the fuel tank cap .... 110 1-7. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system ................. 115

Wireless remote control......... 57

Alarm............................................ 117

Side doors..................................... 61

Theft prevention labels .......... 119

Back door .................................... 64 1-8. Safety information 1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Correct driving posture ....... 120 SRS airbags .............................. 122

Front seats................................... 75

Front passenger occupant classification system............ 134

Rear seats................................... 80

Child restraint systems ......... 139

Driving position memory....... 84

Installing child restraints....... 143

Head restraints .......................... 87 Seat belts .................................... 89 Steering wheel........................... 97

25

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care. The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

Gasoline engine Front electric motor (Traction motor) Rear electric motor (Traction motor)* *: AWD models only

■ When stopped/during start-off The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During startoff, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the motor is used.

26

1-1. Hybrid system

■ During normal driving The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary. 1

Before driving

■ When accelerating sharply The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor). ■ When braking (regenerative braking) The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery).

■ Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery). ● The accelerator pedal is released. ● The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S. ■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions: ● During gasoline engine warm-up ● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging ● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low ● When the heater is switched on

27

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Charging the battery ● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery

does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes. If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.

● If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged.

Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or S to avoid discharging the battery.

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move. Always shift the shift lever to P when parked. The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating, and are not a malfunction: ● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment. ● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) under the rear

seat when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is open. ● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid transmission when the engine is started

or stopped, or while the engine is idling.

● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply. ● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is

depressed and accelerator is loosened.

● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops. ● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents under the rear seat. ■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

28

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system precautions Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

1

Before driving

Air conditioning compressor High voltage cables (orange) Power control unit with DC/ DC converter Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Rear electric motor (traction motor)* Service plug Front electric motor (traction motor) Caution label

*: AWD models only

29

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery air vents There are air intake vents under the rear seats for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vents become blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery output. Emergency shut off system When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer. Hybrid warning message A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (P. 575)

30

1-1. Hybrid system

■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery

is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

1

■ When refueling, the fuel filler door may take a few moments to open

■ Electromagnetic waves ● High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromag-

netic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio

parts.

● Consult your Lexus dealer before installing or removing third party-produced

radio parts.

■ Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (P. 566) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning light go out is about 2.7 gal. [10.1 L, 2.2 Imp. gal.] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)

31

Before driving

As part of emission system operation, it may take up to 10 seconds for the fuel filler door to automatically release after the opener switch is pressed. Before refueling is possible, a message will be shown on the multi-information display. (P. 110)

1-1. Hybrid system

CAUTION ■ High voltage and high temperature precautions

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. ● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables and

their connectors.

● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.

Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle. ● Never try to open the service plug access

hole located under the rear seat. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

■ Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury: ● Pull your vehicle off the road, shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, and

turn the hybrid system off.

● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors. ● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may

occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch it as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from

the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never

use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.

32

1-1. Hybrid system

CAUTION ● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with all front wheels (for 2WD models) or

● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked

onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

■ Nickel-metal hydride battery

Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury. ■ Emergency shut off system

Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables. Never touch the parts or cables. (P. 29)

NOTICE ■ Hybrid battery air vents ● Do not put foreign objects over the air vents. The hybrid battery (traction battery)

may overheat or lose power and be damaged.

● Clean the air vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from

overheating.

● Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vents as this may cause a

short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● Do not carry large amounts of water such as an aquarium into the vehicle. If water

spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

33

1

Before driving

four wheels (for AWD models) raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity leakage leading to a fire. (P. 557)

1-1. Hybrid system

Energy monitor/consumption screen You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display and the navigation system screen.

Navigation system screen (if equipped) Multi-information display

Remote Touch* “MENU” button Remote Touch knob “ENTER” button *: For use of the Remote Touch, refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Energy monitor Navigation system (if equipped) STEP 1

34

Press the “MENU” button.

1-1. Hybrid system

STEP 2

Select

on the

screen

and press the “ENTER” button on the Remote Touch.

Select

and press the

“ENTER” button. If the or screen is displayed, select and press the “ENTER” button. Multi-information display Toggle the “ENTER” switch on the steering wheel upward or downward through several items to select the energy monitor display.

35

Before driving

STEP 3

1

1-1. Hybrid system

Navigation screen

Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor) When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor) When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

When there is no energy flow Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

Low

Full

Low

Full

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. 36

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Consumption (vehicles with a navigation system) STEP 1

Press the “MENU” button and select

. 1

Select

and press the “ENTER” button.

If the screen does not appear, select press the “ENTER” button.

and

Fuel consumption in the past 30 minutes Regenerated energy in the past 30 minutes One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 4 symbols are shown.

Cruising range ■ Past record (vehicles with a navigation system) STEP 1

Press the “MENU” button and select

STEP 2

Select

.

and push the “ENTER” button.

If the screen does not appear, select press the “ENTER” button.

and

37

Before driving

STEP 2

1-1. Hybrid system

Best past fuel consumption Average fuel consumption

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. ■ Resetting the consumption data

Selecting on the screen will reset the fuel consumption and the regenerated energy for the past 30 minutes. Selecting on the screen will reset the past records. Selecting resetting of all the data (except cruising range).

38

will confirm

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid vehicle driving tips For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:

■ Use of the Hybrid System Indicator

1

More fuel efficient driving is possible by keeping the indicate of the Hybrid System Indicator within the Eco area.

Before driving

■ When braking the vehicle Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

■ Delays Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

■ Highway driving Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping at a tool booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

■ Air conditioning Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption. In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner and reduce fuel consumption as well. In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

39

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Checking tire inflation pressure Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate for the season.

■ Luggage Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause poor fuel consumption.

■ Warming up before driving Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to poor fuel consumption.

40

1-2. Key information

Keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys • Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 46) • Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 57)

1

Before driving

Mechanical keys Key number plate Card key (electronic key) (if equipped) Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 46) The card key comes with an information card that includes instructions for use. Lexus recommends that you carry the information card with the card key.

41

1-2. Key information

Using the mechanical key To take out the mechanical key: Electronic keys: Slide the release lever and take the key out. Card key: Press the lock release button and take the key out. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and reattempt to insert it. Mechanical keys with grooves on one side can be inserted in one direction only. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 614) ■ Card key ● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a

problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.

● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, press down the lock release button

using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.

● To store the mechanical key in the card

key, insert it while pressing the lock release button.

42

1-2. Key information

● If the battery cover is not installed and

the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.

1

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 422) Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. ■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (P. 613) ■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

43

Before driving

● The card key is not waterproof.

1-2. Key information

NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage

Observe the following: ● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. ● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time. ● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. ● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to

such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys. ● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key. ● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,

audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly. ■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-

related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the card key, to your Lexus dealer. ■ When a vehicle key is lost

If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that was provided with your vehicle.

44

1-2. Key information

NOTICE ■ Precautions for handling the card key ● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key.

Doing so may damage the card key.

1

● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode.

● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.

Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.

● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose. ● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.

Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.

● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the

following situations:

• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys. • The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil. • The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.

45

Before driving

If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart access system with push-button start The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Locks and unlocks the side doors (P. 47) Locks and unlocks the back door (P. 47) Starts the hybrid system (P. 166)

46

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the side doors (front door handles only) Grip the handle to unlock the door.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Unlocking and locking the back door Press the button to unlock the door. The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.

47

1

Before driving

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Press the button to lock the door.

Antenna location and effective range ■ Antenna location Antennas outside the cabin Antennas inside the cabin Antenna inside the luggage compartment Antenna outside the luggage compartment

48

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors

When starting the hybrid system or changing “POWER” switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle. ■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) ■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door

handle

Touch both lock sensors on the upper and lower part of the door handle simultaneously.

49

1

Before driving

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 575) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Alarm

Situation

Correction procedure

Exterior alarm An attempt was made to lock Close all of the doors sounds once for 10 the vehicle while a door was and lock the doors seconds. open. again. The “POWER” switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open. (The driver's door Interior alarm pings was opened when the “POWER” switch is in repeatedly ACCESSORY mode.) The “POWER” switch was turned off while the driver's door is open.

Close the driver's door.

Close the driver's door.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

50

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle 12-volt battery from discharging and the electronic key battery from depleting. 1

● When the entry function has not been used for 5 days or more ● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the

Before driving

vehicle for 10 minutes or more

● If the entry function has not been used for 14 days or more, the vehicle cannot

be unlocked by a door other than the driver's door. To unlock the vehicle, grip the driver's door handle or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key.

The system will resume operation when: ● The vehicle is locked using the lock sensor. ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.

(P. 57)

● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 614) ■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 614) ● When the electronic key battery is depleted ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,

airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-

less communication devices

● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-

lic objects • • • • • •

Cards to which aluminum foil is attached Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside Metallic wallets or bags Coins Hand warmers made of metal Media such as CDs and DVDs 51

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity ● When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby ● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit

radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) • Digital audio players • Portable game systems ● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window ■ Note for the entry function ● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the

system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, or in the glove box. ● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle. ● The doors may lock or unlock if the electronic key is within the effective range

and a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if a door is not opened and closed.

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key

is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

52

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Notes for locking the doors ● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock

operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals

will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during

a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow,

mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle.

Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

■ Notes for the unlocking function ● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. ● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer

to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods ● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m)

of the vehicle.

● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.

(P. 656)

53

Before driving

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective

1

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.) ■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly ● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key.

(P. 515)

● Starting the hybrid system: P. 615 ■ Electronic key battery depletion ● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year

and a half.)

● As the electronic key always transmits radio waves, the battery will become

depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 515)

• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate. • The detection area becomes smaller. • The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on. ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field: • • • • • •

54

TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Glass top ranges Table lamps

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 515 ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

1

Before driving

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Low. For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-6 FCC ID: HYQ13CZF FCC ID: HYQ14ACX FCC ID: HYQ14AEB NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

55

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away

from the smart access system antennas. (P. 48) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and

implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for disabling the entry function.

56

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Wireless remote control The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. It also opens and closes the back door.

Vehicles without a power back door

1

Before driving

Locks all the doors Unlocks all the doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof (press and hold)* Sounds the alarm (press and hold) (P. 117) *: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

Vehicles with a power back door Locks all the doors Unlocks all the doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof (press and hold)* Opens and closes the back door (press and hold) Sounds the alarm (press and hold) (P. 117) *: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer. 57

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals

Side doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Back door: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door is opening/closing. Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are opening. ■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Security feature

P. 50 ■ Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key. ■ Back door operation

The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed. ■ Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 117) ■ Reversing the operation of the power back door

Pressing the wireless remote control switch again while the power back door is operating will cause the operation to reverse.

58

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 51 ■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 614)

1

Before driving

■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 54 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 515 ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

59

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Certification for wireless remote control

This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Law. For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-6 FCC ID: HYQ13CZF FCC ID: HYQ14ACX FCC ID: HYQ14AEB NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

60

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switches.

■ Entry function P. 47

1

Before driving

■ Wireless remote control P. 57 ■ Door lock switches Locks all the doors Unlocks all the doors

■ Inside lock buttons Locks the door Unlocks the door The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

61

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key Move the inside lock button to the lock position. STEP 2 Close the door. The door cannot be locked if the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. STEP 1

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. ■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 614) ■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to protect the inside mechanism. ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

62

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

Before driving

● Always use a seat belt.

1

● Always lock all the doors. ● Ensure that all the doors are properly closed. ● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle, resulting in serious injury or death. Be especially careful with the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in the locked position.

● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats. ■ When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.

63

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the following procedures:

■ Locking and unlocking the back door Door lock switches P. 61 Entry function P. 47 Wireless remote control P. 57 ■ Opening the back door from outside the vehicle Back door opener button Press the back door opener button to release the lock. Raise the back door.

Wireless remote control (vehicles with a power back door) P. 57

64

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Opening the back door from inside the vehicle (vehicles with a power back door) Press the switch to open/close.

1

Before driving

Pressing the switch again while the power back door is operating will cause the operation to reverse.

Power back door switch (vehicles with a power back door) Press the switch to close the back door. Pressing the switch again while the power back door is closing will cause it to open again.

65

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with a power back door) Turn off the main switch in the glove box to disable the power back door system. On Off The back door cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or power back door switch.

■ The power back door can be operated when ● The back door is unlocked. (Except for using the wireless remote control) ● The power back door main switch is on. ● To open the power back door when the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, the

power back door main switch must be on, the vehicle speed must be lower than 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever must be in P.

■ Back door handle

Use the back door handle when lowering the back door. Do not close the back door fully while still holding the door handle as an injury may result.

66

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Luggage compartment lights

The luggage compartment lights turn on when the back door is opened with the luggage compartment light switch on.

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. ● The back door closer will operate regardless of “POWER” switch mode. ● The back door can be opened while the back door closer is operating by press-

ing the back door opener button.

■ Power back door operation ● A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the

back door is opening/closing.

● The back door can still be opened and closed manually, even when the power

back door main switch is off.

● Pressing the back door opener button while the power back door system is

operating will cause the back door to switch to manual operation.

● If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, a buzzer

will sound and the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.

● If two or more successive attempts are made to close the back door, a buzzer

will sound and the back door will switch to manual operation.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with a power back door)

Sensors are attached to the left and right sides of the power back door. If these sensors detect an obstruction while the power back door is closing, the jam protection function will return the door to the fully open position.

67

Before driving

■ Back door closer (vehicles with a power back door)

1

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ After the back door has been opened and then closed

Lock the back door again as the back door will not lock automatically. ■ Luggage mode (vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension)

Pressing the vehicle height selector switch to lower the vehicle height makes loading luggage easier. (P. 243) ■ If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be opened from the inside. STEP 1

Remove the cover.

STEP 2 Move the lever.

Vehicles with a power back door

Vehicles without a power back door

68

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ When re-connecting the 12-volt battery

To enable the power back door system to operate properly, perform the following procedures to initialize the system: ● Unlock the back door using the door lock switch. ● Lower the back door manually using the back door handle and fully close the

1

back door by pushing it down.

Before driving

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving ● Keep the back door closed while driving.

If the back door is left open, it may hit nearby objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.

● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back

door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.

● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking

or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could overheat.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door, which may result in death or serious injury of the child.

■ Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before open-

ing it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to fall closed again after it is opened.

69

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION ● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-

rounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back

door is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may

move abruptly in strong wind.

● The back door may fall if it is not opened

fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.

● When closing the back door, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

● When closing the back door, make sure to

press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not

hang on the back door damper stay. Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the back door.

Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to fall closed again after it is opened.

70

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION ■ Back door closer ● In the event that the back door is left slightly

● Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power

back door system is cancelled.

■ Power back door

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door. Failure to do so may cause serious injury. ● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or

anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back

door is about to open or close.

● If the power back door switch is pressed while the back door is opening during

automatic operation, the back door stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close suddenly.

● If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer

may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the back door may move abruptly.

● If the power back door main switch is turned off while the power back door is

operating, the back door will change to manual operation. In this case, be careful as the back door may move suddenly.

● On an incline, the back door may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the

back door is fully open and secure.

71

1

Before driving

open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION ● In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and

automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped back door may suddenly fall, causing an accident.

• When the back door contacts an obstacle • When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic operation ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the back door. The power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may fall closed again after it is opened. ● In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door

main switch. Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.

72

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION ■ Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

1

● Be careful while the jam protection function is operating. Being hit by the back ● Although the back door stops closing when the jam protection function detects

an object, take extra care as you may still be injured if part of your body is already caught.

● If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing, the jam protection

function will cause the back door to automatically operate in the opposite direction. However, be careful not to jam body parts in the doorframe, as an injury may result.

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object

that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

● The sensors located on the right and left sides of the power back door detect

obstructions and prevent them from becoming jammed in the door. Some objects may not be detected depending on their shape or how they are jammed. Be careful not to get fingers or other body parts caught in the back door while it is operating as this may result in a serious injury.

73

Before driving

door may result in an injury.

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors

NOTICE ■ Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction. ● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as

stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.

● Do not touch the damper stay rod with

gloves or other fabric items.

● Do not attach any accessories other than

genuine Lexus parts to the back door.

● Do not place your hand on the damper stay

or apply lateral forces to it.

■ To prevent back door closer malfunction ● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is oper-

ating.

● If the back door is opened and closed repeatedly in a short amount of time, the

back door closer may stop operating. In this case, manually open the back door once and wait for a while before attempting to close it again.

■ To prevent damage to the power back door ● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would pre-

vent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.

● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is oper-

ating.

● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the

power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.

● When manually closing the back door immediately after the power back door

has been automatically opened fully, some resistance may be felt.

74

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

1

Before driving

Seat position adjustment switch Seatback angle adjustment switch Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch Vertical height adjustment switch Lumbar support adjustment switch Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped)

75

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Flattening the front seatbacks ■ Before flattening the front seatbacks Slide the rear seats as far back as possible. (P. 80) ■ Flattening the front seatbacks STEP 1

Move the front seat forward, raise the seat, and remove the head restraint. (P. 87) After returning the seat to its original position, make sure to replace the head restraint.

STEP 2

76

Move the seatback angle adjustment switch backward to flatten the seatback.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power easy access system (vehicles with driving position memory) When the driver enters and exits the vehicle, the driver's seat and steering wheel will automatically perform the following operations:

• The shift lever has been shifted to P • The “POWER” switch has been turned off • The driver seat belt has been unfastened

Entering the vehicle: When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward (auto return function): • The “POWER” switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode • The driver seat belt has been fastened

77

1

Before driving

Exiting the vehicle: When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver and the seat will move backward (auto away function):

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Active head restraints When the occupant’s lower back presses against the seatback during a rear-end collision, the head restraint moves slightly forward and upward to help reduce the risk of whiplash to the seat occupant.

■ The auto away function for exiting the driver seat

If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not operate when the driver exits the vehicle. ■ Active head restraints

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.

Inner structure

During rear-end collision

■ Customization

The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function can be changed. (Customizable featuresP. 656) 78

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment ● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the

● Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

■ While driving

Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat.

79

1

Before driving

seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Rear seats

Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Folding down the rear seatbacks ■ Before folding down the rear seatbacks Stow all the head restraints and the rear center seat belt buckle.

80

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Stow the seat belts inside the rear seat side pockets. 1

Before driving

■ Folding down the rear seatbacks From inside Pull the seatback angle adjustment lever. To return the rear seatbacks to their original positions, lift them up until they lock.

From outside Pull the levers. Left side lever: Folds down the left side rear seat Right side lever: Folds down the right side and center rear seats To return the rear seatbacks to their original positions, lift them up until they lock.

81

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Folding down the rear center seatback Pull the center seatback lever behind the seatback and fold the seatback down. To return the rear center seatback to its original position, lift it up until it locks.

CAUTION ■ When folding the rear seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving. ● Do not fold seatbacks down while passengers are seated or luggage is placed on

the seats.

● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to

P.

● After folding the seatback, lightly move the seat back and forth to lock it in place. ● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment

while driving.

● Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment. ■ Seat adjustment ● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the

seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

82

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION ■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

1

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward on

Before driving

the top.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

NOTICE ■ Stowing the center seat belt buckle

Before folding down the rear seatbacks, stow the center seat belt buckle to prevent it from becoming caught in the seatbacks.

83

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked. Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

■ Entering a position to memory STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode. STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. Press the “SET” button, then STEP 3 within 3 seconds press button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

■ Recalling the memorized position STEP 1 Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 2 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode. Press button “1”, “2” or “3” until STEP 3 the signal beeps to recall the desired position.

: If equipped 84

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following:

STEP 1

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P and close the driver's door. Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode. Press the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”) to recall the position. Then, while keep pressing the button, press the driver's door lock switches (either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps. The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver's door is opened.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “POWER” switch off

Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel position) can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again, even after turning the “POWER” switch off. ■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode and close the driver's door. STEP 2 While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switches

(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

85

1

Before driving

Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Stopping seat position operation part-way through

Perform any of the following operations: ● Press the “SET” button. ● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall). ● Adjust the steering wheel using the tilt and telescopic steering control switch

(only cancels steering wheel position recall).

■ Correct seat position

When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled. ■ When the power easy access system (P. 77) is activated

If a seat position is memorized, the driver seat will move back the set distance (P. 656) from that memorized position.

CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

86

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Head restraints Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Up Pull the head restraints up.

1

Down Before driving

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button. Lock release button

■ Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button ■ Installing the head restraints

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

87

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Always raise the head restraints to the uppermost lock position during use.

CAUTION ■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are

locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

88

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

1

Before driving

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ● Do not twist the seat belt. ■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. To release the seat belt, press the release button. Release button

89

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats) Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button. Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up. Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats) If the shoulder belt sits close to a person's neck, use the seat belt comfort guide. STEP 1

Pull the comfort guide from the pocket.

STEP 2

Slide the belt past the slot of the guide. The elastic cord must be behind the seat belt.

90

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

STEP 3

Buckle the seat belt and position it comfortably. 1

Before driving

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats) The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision. The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.

91

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with a pre-collision system) If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing the effectiveness of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash. The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 260) ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. To allow the belt to extend, retract the belt and then pull it slowly. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. (P. 143) ■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 89) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the round part of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

92

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes ● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,

follow the instructions on P. 89 regarding seat belt usage.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. ■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

93

Before driving

large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 139)

1

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■ Wearing a seat belt ● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. ● Always wear a seat belt properly. ● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more

than one person at once, including children.

● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat

belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. ■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 90) ■ Seat belt pretensioners ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so

will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,

the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.

94

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION ■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution

■ Seat belt damage and wear ● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed

in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.

Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in

a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Using a seat belt comfort guide

Failure to observe the following precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury. ● Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must be

behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.

● To reduce the chance of injury in case of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or acci-

dent while driving, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket when it is not in use.

● Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the shoul-

der. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not fall off the shoulder.

95

1

Before driving

Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION ■ Using a seat belt extender ● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because

the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by

another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE ■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

96

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:

1

Before driving

Up Down Away from the driver Toward the driver

Auto tilt away When the “POWER” switch is turned off, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit. Turning the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode will return the steering wheel to the original position. ■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode*. *: Vehicles with driving position memory: If the driver's seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of “POWER” switch mode. ■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (vehicles with driving position

memory)

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (P. 84) 97

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Notes for the auto tilt away function (vehicles with driving position memory)

The auto tilt away function can only operate when the “POWER” switch has been turned off, the driver seat belt has been unfastened and the driver’s seat movement (P. 656) is in a setting other than off. When the driver fastens the seat belt again, the steering wheel will return to the original position. (P. 77)

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

98

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Turns automatic mode on/off

1

Indicator

Before driving

The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on. The mirror will revert to automatic mode each time the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode.

■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

99

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch. STEP 1

To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch. Left Right Pressing the same switch again will put the switch in neutral.

STEP 2

To adjust the mirror, press the switch. Up Right Down Left

Manually folding and extending the mirrors Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

100

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Automatically folding and extending the mirrors (if equipped) ■ Using the switch Press the switch to fold the mirrors.

1

Press it again to return them. Before driving

■ Setting automatic mode Indicator

Automatic mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to locking/unlocking of the doors. Press the “AUTO” button to set automatic mode. The indicator will come on.

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. ■ Linked mirror function when reversing

The right and left outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. This function only operates when either the “L” or “R” mirror select button is selected. ■ When the mirrors are fogged up

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 303)

101

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position mem-

ory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (P. 84) ■ Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 99)

CAUTION ■ When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded. ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror. ■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

102

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing One-touch closing* Opening One-touch opening*

1

Before driving

*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-

site direction will stop window travel partway.

Window lock switch Indicator

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches. The indicator will come on. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the power window switches on the driver’s side even if the lock switch is on.

103

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. ■ Door lock linked window operation ● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(P. 614)

● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control if custom-

ized at your Lexus dealer. (P. 57)

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the battery. ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

104

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION ■ Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

1

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a ● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the window fully closes. Also, the jam protection does not operate when the power window switch is pulled up continually to close the windows.

105

Before driving

position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

■ Opening and closing Opens the moon roof* The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise. Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof* *: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.

■ Tilting up and down Tilts the moon roof up* Tilts the moon roof down* *: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.

: If equipped 106

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. ■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. ■ Door lock linked moon roof operation ● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 614) ● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control if customized

at your Lexus dealer. * (P. 57)

*: This function cannot be customized unless power window operation using the wireless remote control is enabled.

107

1

Before driving

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure: ● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly STEP 1 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close. STEP 2 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then

release the switch. ● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up STEP 1 Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up

position and stops. STEP 2 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch

again.*1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close. STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then

release the switch. *1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning. *2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

108

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION ■ Opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

1

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while

Before driving

it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof. ■ Closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a

position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the moon roof fully closes.

109

1-6. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap The fuel tank of your vehicle has a special structure, which requires a reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. After the opener switch has been pressed, it will take several seconds until the vehicle is ready for refueling.

■ Before refueling the vehicle Turn the “POWER” switch off and close all the doors and windows. ■ Opening the fuel tank cap STEP 1

Press the opener to open the fuel filler door. The fuel filler door will open within about 10 seconds of the switch being pressed. Before refueling is possible, a message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster to indicate the progress of the fuel filler door opener.

STEP 2

110

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

1-6. Refueling

STEP 3

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door. 1

Before driving

Closing the fuel tank cap After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click.

111

1-6. Refueling

■ If the fuel filler door opener is inoperable STEP 1 Lift the luggage mat up. (P. 489) STEP 2

With a compact spare tire only: Remove the spare tire cover.

STEP 3

Remove the 12-volt battery cover.

STEP 4

Pull the lever. If the fuel filler door opener switch cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. If refueling is urgently necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened using the lever in the luggage compartment.

STEP 5

Install the clips.

Using the lever to open the fuel filler door may not allow for an adequate reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling out, turn the cap slowly when removing it. During refueling, fuel may spill out from the filler opening due to air being discharged from inside the fuel tank. Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and slowly. 112

1-6. Refueling

CAUTION ■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to

come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank. ■ When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

113

Before driving

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted

1

1-6. Refueling

NOTICE ■ Refueling ● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal

valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process. Press the fuel filler door opener switch again.

● Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

114

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer. 1

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

Before driving

The indicator light flashes after the “POWER” switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system. ■ Conditions affecting operation

Depending on surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer system may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from starting. (P. 51)

115

1-7. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Law. For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION ■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the key

Do not modify, remove or disable the system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

116

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Alarm The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is detected.

■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered in the following situations:

1

Before driving

● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key with the alarm being set. ● The hood is opened with the alarm being set. ■ Setting the alarm system Close the doors and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms: ● Unlock the doors. ● Start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

117

1-7. Theft deterrent system

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following: ● Nobody is in the vehicle. ● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set. ● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. ■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.) ● A person inside the vehicle opens a door or the hood. ● The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.

118

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

1

Before driving 119

1-8. Safety information

Correct driving posture Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 75) Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 75) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. (P. 75) Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (P. 97) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 87) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 89)

120

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ While driving ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.

1

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are

not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

121

Before driving

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

1-8. Safety information

SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS front airbags SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components SRS knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

122

1-8. Safety information

SRS side and curtain shield airbags Front SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants Rear SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

1

Before driving 123

1-8. Safety information

SRS airbag system components

Knee airbags Front passenger airbag Curtain shield airbags Front side airbags Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors) “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Rear side airbags SRS warning light Driver airbag

Curtain shield airbag sensors Side and curtain shield airbag sensors Driver's seat belt buckle switch Driver's seat position sensor Airbag sensor assembly Front airbag sensors Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

124

1-8. Safety information

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)

SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as

well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack. ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags) ● The front SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the

set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to a 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform). However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck etc.).

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-

cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting

in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 89)

125

1

Before driving

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

1-8. Safety information

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by a 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at a speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]). ■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-

sion (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. ● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole ● Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration. ● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal. ● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

126

1-8. Safety information

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

1

● Collision from the side

Before driving

● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags

(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. ● Collision from the side to the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. ● Collision from the front ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover

127

1-8. Safety information

■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the 12-volt battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer. ● Any of the SRS airbags has been inflated. ● The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of the doors is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side air-

bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars

or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

128

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

1

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. ● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or

serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

129

Before driving

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● If the seat belt extender has been con-

nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can

cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-

ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 139)

130

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean

against the dashboard.

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to

hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side

rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-

senger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

131

Before driving

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

1

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not attach anything to or lean anything

against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas such as the

door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbags will deploy, be sure

to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags

inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag

components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have

deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door

or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and

front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.

132

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. ● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags ● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument

panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant

compartment

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo

bar etc.)

● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players ● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

133

1

Before driving

will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may not deploy in the event of a collision.

1-8. Safety information

Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the condition of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger. Without a navigation system

With a navigation system

SRS warning light “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light “AIR BAG ON” indicator light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

134

1-8. Safety information

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system ■ Adult*1 “AIR BAG ON” Off Flashing*2

Activated

■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seats Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG OFF”*5 Off Flashing*2 Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated

135

1

Before driving

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seats Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

1-8. Safety information

■ Unoccupied Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” Not illuminated indicator lights SRS warning light Off Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Deactivated Side airbag on the front passenger seats Activated Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

■ There is a malfunction in the system Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seats Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

136

1-8. Safety information

*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 139) *5: If the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 143)

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the

buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the

seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment. ● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on

the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on

the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

137

Before driving

CAUTION

1

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions ● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This

may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-

minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 143)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats. ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,

the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-

backs.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat

cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

138

1-8. Safety information

Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

1

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. ● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. ● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 143) Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

139

Before driving

Points to remember

1-8. Safety information

Forward facing  Convertible seat

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and

use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 89)

140

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must

● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to

the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even

if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if a rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the

front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

141

1

Before driving

be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. This may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident. ■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution

Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■ When the child restraint system is not in use ● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.

Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or

store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

142

1-8. Safety information

Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint. 1

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Before driving

Child restraint LATCH anchors LATCH anchors are provided for the outer rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.) Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (P. 89)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

143

1-8. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system Fold the seatback while pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the first lock position. (P. 80)

STEP 1

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. Type A Latch the hooks of the lower straps STEP 3 onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor bracket. STEP 2

For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

144

1-8. Safety information

Type B Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor bracket.

STEP 3

Canada only STEP 4

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 150)

145

Before driving

For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1

1-8. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) ■ Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat Fold the seatback while pulling the STEP 1 seatback angle adjustment lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the first lock position. (P. 80)

STEP 2

STEP 3

146

Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

1-8. Safety information

STEP 4

While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

■ Forward-facing Convertible seat Fold the seatback while pulling the STEP 1 seatback angle adjustment lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the first lock position. (P. 80)

STEP 2

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

147

1

Before driving

STEP 5

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

1-8. Safety information

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

STEP 6

148

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 150)

1-8. Safety information

■ Booster seat STEP 1

STEP 3

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 89)

149

1

Before driving

STEP 2

Fold the seatback while pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the first lock position. (P. 80)

1-8. Safety information

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap STEP 1

STEP 2

Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or the lower anchors, and remove the head restraint.

Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

150

1-8. Safety information

STEP 3

Replace the head restraint and lift it up to the uppermost lock position. 1

Before driving

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION ■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 92)

151

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child

restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it

does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat

cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. The seatbacks must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● When using the LATCH system, move the seat as far back as possible and adjust

the seatback as upright as possible.

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

152

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION ■ When installing a child restraint system ● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it

1

is secure.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-

turer.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

153

Before driving

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

1-8. Safety information

154

When driving 2-1. Driving procedures

2 2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving the vehicle.................. 156

Cruise control......................... 220

Power (ignition) switch .......... 166 Hybrid transmission ................ 171

Dynamic radar cruise control .................................... 224

Turn signal lever....................... 179

Intuitive parking assist.......... 235

Parking brake.......................... 180

Electronically modulated air suspension....................... 242

Horn ............................................. 181 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters................ 182 Indicators and warning lights ......................................... 185 Multi-information display..... 189 Head-up display ...................... 195 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch.................... 200 Automatic High Beam......... 205 Fog light switch ......................... 211 Windshield wipers and washer ..................................... 213 Rear window wiper and washer ..................................... 218 Headlight cleaner switch...... 219

Rear view monitor system (rear view mirror-attached type) ........................................ 248 Driving assist systems........... 252 Hill-start assist control ......... 258 Pre-Collision System............ 260 2-5. Driving information Utility vehicle precautions........................... 264 Cargo and luggage ............... 269 Vehicle load limits.................. 273 Winter driving tips.................. 274 Trailer towing (AWD models with towing package)......... 278 Trailer towing (2WD models and AWD models without towing package)................... 291 Dinghy towing......................... 292

155

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■ Starting the hybrid system P. 166 ■ Driving STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 171) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 180) Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. ■ Stopping STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. STEP 3

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. (P. 171)

■ Parking the vehicle STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 Set the parking brake. (P. 180) STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 171) If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed. STEP 4 STEP 5

Press the “POWER” switch to stop the hybrid system. Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

Starting off on a steep uphill STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3

156

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Driving in the rain ● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows

may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially

slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because

there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

2

■ Breaking in your new Lexus

● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

• • • •

Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation. ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 630)

157

When driving

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

2-1. Driving procedures

■ For efficient use ● Shift the shift lever to D when driving.

In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge.

● Drive your vehicle smoothly.

Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.

● Avoid repeated acceleration.

Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

● Shift the shift lever to P when parking.

In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge. Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.

■ Environment-friendly driving

During environment-friendly acceleration operation (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on. If the accelerator pedal is depressed more than necessary, the indicator will turn off. Eco Driving Indicator Light will operate when the vehicle is being driven with the shift lever in D. The indicator will not operate when the vehicle is in snow mode or EV drive mode. (P. 173, 174) ■ Customization

Setting of Eco Driving Indicator Light can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

158

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator

pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or

roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check

that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

159

2

When driving

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ● The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid

system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged.

● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid sys-

tem off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: (P. 566)

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a

steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 171)

● When stopped on an incline, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backward or forward, causing an accident.

● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside

rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not

outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

160

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do

not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

● On vehicles with an electronically modulated air suspension, if you drive through

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce

your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting

and down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that

the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. ■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible. The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

161

2

When driving

water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the firmness of the river bed. Put the vehicle in “HI” (high) mode with the height selector switch and then turn off the electronically modulated air suspension by pressing the height control off switch. Drive your vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or lower.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ■ When the vehicle is stopped ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the hybrid system is operating to

prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.

● When stopped on an incline, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backward or forward, causing an accident.

■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-

cle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components. ● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. ● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain-

ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal-

lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system

and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.

162

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the hybrid system is operating or immedi-

ately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns.

● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where

it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Exhaust gases

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. ■ When braking the vehicle ● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles

closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

163

When driving

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

2

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems

fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake system warning light (red indicator) comes on together with the buzzer sound while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

■ If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NOTICE ■ When driving the vehicle

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill. ■ When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an

extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-

ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. ● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 596) 164

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE ■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle: ● Engine stalling ● Short in electrical components ● Engine damage caused by water immersion

● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid trans-

mission, etc., and, for AWD models, the rear electric motor (traction motor).

● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and

the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

165

2

When driving

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following:

2-1. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER” switch modes.

■ Starting the hybrid system STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal. The “POWER” switch indicator will turn green. If the indicator does not turn green, the hybrid system cannot be started. STEP 4

Press the “POWER” switch. After a while, the “READY” indicator comes on with a beep sound. The vehicle can move when the “READY” indicator is on even if the engine is stopped. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the hybrid system is completely started. The hybrid system can be started from any mode.

■ Stopping the hybrid system STEP 1 Stop the vehicle. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P. STEP 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 180) STEP 4 Press the “POWER” switch. STEP 5 Release the brake pedal and check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch is off.

166

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Changing “POWER” switch modes Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) Off* The emergency flashers can be used.

2

ACCESSORY mode When driving

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. The “POWER” switch indicator turns amber.

ON mode All electrical components can be used. The “POWER” switch indicator turns amber.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the “POWER” switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

167

2-1. Driving procedures

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

Check that the parking brake is set. Shift the shift lever to P. Check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch is illuminated in amber and then press the “POWER” switch once. Check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch is off.

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “POWER” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating. ■ Operation of the “POWER” switch

When operating the “POWER” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the “POWER” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle P. 28 ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 54 ■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on. ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 51 ■ Note for the entry function P. 52 ■ If the hybrid system does not start

The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 115)

168

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Steering lock

After turning the “POWER” switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the “POWER” switch again automatically cancels the steering lock. ■ When the steering lock cannot be released

The green indicator light on the “POWER” switch will flash and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the “POWER” switch again while turning the steering wheel left and right.

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 2 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning. ■ When the “POWER” switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on

If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER” switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning P. 576 ■ If the electronic key battery is depleted P. 515

CAUTION ■ When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

169

When driving

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

2

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

If a hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 3 seconds. However, do not touch the "POWER" switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long peri-

ods of time without the hybrid system on.

● If the indicator on the “POWER” switch is illuminated, the “POWER” switch is not

off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the “POWER” switch is off.

● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If

the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

■ When starting the hybrid system

Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. ■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “POWER” switch

If the “POWER” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

170

2-1. Driving procedures

Hybrid transmission Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

2

When driving

While the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

■ Shift position purpose Shift position

Function

P

Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

R

Reversing

N

Neutral

D

Normal driving*1

S

S mode driving*2 (P. 175)

*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving.

*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode controls engine braking forces. 171

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Selecting eco mode When the vehicle is driven in eco mode, vehicle driving force and operation of the air conditioning system is controlled to improve fuel efficiency. STEP 1

Press the menu switch. The multi-information display will change modes to electronic features control mode.

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards until “ECO MODE” appears. STEP 2

Press the “ENTER” switch to change to “ON”. The “ECO MODE” indicator will be displayed. Each pressing of the switch turns eco mode on and off.

Press the menu switch to change to the normal display.

172

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Selecting snow mode Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces such as snow. STEP 1

Press the menu switch. The multi-information display will change modes to electronic features control mode.

2

STEP 2

When driving

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards until “HYBRID SNOW” appears. Press the “ENTER” switch to change to “ON”. The “Hybrid SNOW” indicator will be displayed. Each pressing of the switch turns snow mode on and off.

Press the menu switch to change to the normal display.

173

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Selecting EV drive mode In EV drive mode, the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle. This mode allows you to drive in residential areas late at night or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and exhaust gas emissions. STEP 1

Press the menu switch. The multi-information display will change modes to electronic features control mode. When the menu switch is pressed within 10 seconds of the hybrid system being started, “EV” will be the first mode displayed.

STEP 2

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards until “EV” appears. Press the “ENTER” switch to change to “ON”. The EV drive mode indicator will be displayed. Each pressing of the switch turns EV drive mode on and off.

Press the menu switch to change to the normal display.

174

2-1. Driving procedures

Changing shift ranges in S mode When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be operated as follows: For upshifting For downshifting 2

■ Shift ranges and their functions ● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force. ● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

175

When driving

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “5” or “4” according to vehicle speed.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Automatic return to normal driving mode

If snow mode or EV drive mode is selected, the driving mode will automatically return to normal mode when the hybrid system is turned off. ■ S mode ● When the shift range is “5” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the

shift range to “6”.

● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur. ■ AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver performance and driving conditions. AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.) ■ When driving with the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control

Engine braking will not occur in S mode, even when downshifting to “5” or “4”. (P. 220, 224) ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 612 ■ If S does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the hybrid transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (In this situation, the hybrid transmission will operate in the same as manner as when the shift lever is in D.) ■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The buzzer will sound twice.)

176

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multiinformation display. ● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.

The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.

The vehicle has been left in extremely low temperatures for a long period of time etc.

2

● The gasoline engine is warming up.

When driving

● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. ● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc. ● The windshield defogger is in use. ■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off. ● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low. ● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h). ● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc. ■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

In EV drive mode, it is possible to drive up about 0.5 mile (1 km) if driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. (The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.) ■ Fuel economy

RX450h is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

177

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly. Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident. ■ Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving.

NOTICE ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge precaution

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.

178

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intention of the driver: Right turn Left turn Lane change to the right (push and hold the lever partway)

2

When driving

The right hand signals will flash until you release the lever.

Lane change to the left (push and hold the lever partway) The left hand signals will flash until you release the lever.

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

179

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

U.S.A.

Canada

To set the parking brake, fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot. (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

NOTICE ■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

180

2-1. Driving procedures

Horn To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

2

When driving 181

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Hybrid System Indicator Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level

Multi-information display P. 189

Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Odometer and trip meter Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently. Shift position and shift range display P. 171

Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature 182

2-2. Instrument cluster

Changing the display Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the button will reset the trip meter. 2

When driving

Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Darker Brighter

183

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ Hybrid System Indicator ● By keeping the indicator within the Eco area, more environment-friendly driving

can be achieved.

● The Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be

used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).

*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 620)

184

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

2

When driving

Center panel (without a navigation system)

Center panel (with a navigation system)

185

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (P. 179) Headlight high beam indicator (P. 202)

(if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 235)

* “AFS OFF” indicator (P. 202) (if equipped)

* Automatic High Beam

* Slip indicator

indicator (P. 205)

(P. 253, 258)

(if equipped)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Headlight indicator (P. 200)

* VSC off indicator (P. 254)

Tail light indicator (P. 200) Front fog light indicator (P. 211)

“ECO MODE” indicator (P. 172)

* Electronically modulated (if equipped)

(if equipped)

186

air suspension indicator (P. 242)

Cruise control indicator (P. 220, 224)

“READY” indicator (P. 166)

Radar cruise control indicator (P. 224)

“Hybrid SNOW” indicator (P. 173)

2-2. Instrument cluster

* (without navigation system)

* SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 134)

* Eco Driving Indicator Light (P. 158)

(with navigation system)

SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 134)

EV drive mode indicator (P. 174)

2

When driving

*: These lights turn on when the “POWER” switch is turned to the ON mode

to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

187

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 566) *

*

* (U.S.A.)

*

* (Canada)

*

* (U.S.A.)

* (U.S.A.)

*

* (if equipped)

* (Canada)

* (Canada)

* (for driver)

(for front passenger)

*: These lights turn on when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode

to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

188

2-2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature.

■ Multi-information switches Menu switch Changes modes to electronic features control mode, customization mode or back to normal display mode

2

When driving

“ENTER” switch Changes trip information items. This switch is also used to turn on/off electronic features controls and to change customization settings.

189

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Display contents

Trip information contents

Switching display items

Energy monitor Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption after refueling Average fuel consumption Average vehicle speed Cruising range Tire inflation pressure - (off)

190

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards.

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

When driving

Electronic features control contents

Setting electronic features controls

Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

P. 235

Eco mode

P. 172

Snow mode

P. 173

AFS (if equipped)

P. 202

EV drive mode

P. 174

Display order may vary depending on vehicle condition. Other contents Outside temperature

Details Displays the outside temperature

Dynamic radar cruise control display Automatically displayed when using (if equipped) (P. 224) dynamic radar cruise control Customization (P. 656)

Settings of functions such as the door lock and light illumination time can be changed

Warning message (P. 575)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle's systems 191

2-2. Instrument cluster

Trip information ■ Energy monitor Displays the status of the hybrid system (P. 34) ■ Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption ■ Average fuel consumption after refueling Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled ■ Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset The function can be reset by pushing the “ENTER” switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

■ Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset The function can be reset by pushing the “ENTER” switch for longer than one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

■ Cruising range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining • This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

192

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Tire inflation pressure Displays inflation pressure of each tire. There is no correlation between the order of the displayed values and the tire positions. If the inflation pressure of any tire drops a certain amount below the tire inflation pressure value currently memorized in the system, the displayed values will be highlighted. It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

■ Electronic features control can be turned on/off when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ Conditions for ending electronic features control

In the following situations, the electronic features control will end: ● The menu switch is pressed ● The radar cruise control is operated ● Intuitive parking assist starts operating ● No action is performed for some time after the electronic features control

screen is displayed

● A warning message appears after the electronic features control screen is dis-

played

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change. ● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 15 mph [25 km/h]) ● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a

garage, tunnel, etc.)

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. available languages) can be changed. (Customizable featuresP. 656)

193

When driving

If the tire pressure warning light is on or flashing, a message describing the situation will be displayed.

2

2-2. Instrument cluster

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

When operating the electronic features control while driving, take extra notice of the vehicle's surrounding area.

NOTICE ■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

194

2-2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other information onto the windshield.

Head-up display Display brightness will change automatically according to the brightness of the surrounding area.

2

When driving

Head-up display main switch Display contrast adjustment switch Display brightness can be adjusted to the desired level.

Display position adjustment switch

: If equipped 195

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Head-up display contents In addition to vehicle speed, the following information will be displayed: Audio display Displays audio information for approximately 3 seconds when the audio system is operated

Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) Displays the approach warning message (P. 581)

Turn-by-turn navigation* Displays a notification of upcoming intersections during navigation system route guidance

Vehicle speed display *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

196

2-2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display main switch Pressing the button turns the head-up display on/off and changes the vehicle speed display units as follows: Vehicles sold in the U.S.A. OFF  ON (mph)  ON (km/h) OFF

Display adjustment Adjusting display contrast Brighter Darker

Adjusting display position Higher Lower

197

When driving

Except vehicles sold in the U.S.A. OFF  ON (km/h)  ON (mph) OFF

2

2-2. Instrument cluster

Display customization The audio mode display can be shown or hidden. Pressing and holding the head-up display main switch button for more than 2 seconds changes the display to audio display on/off mode. Press the head-up display main switch button to turn the audio display on/off. Customization can be performed when the head-up display is on and the vehicle is traveling at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). ■ Brightness of the head-up display

The headlight control sensor detects the brightness of the area surrounding the head-up display and adjusts the brightness accordingly. (P. 203) ■ Head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

CAUTION ■ Before using the head-up display

Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image's position or brightness may obstruct the driver's view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

198

2-2. Instrument cluster

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to components ● Do not place anything on the head-up display opening. ● If an object falls into the opening of the

head-up display, remove it immediately. Also, avoid spilling water or other liquids near the head-up display opening as this may cause mechanical damage.

2

When driving 199

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

U.S.A. Turn off the daytime running light system The headlights and side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on and off automatically (when the “POWER” switch is in ON mode). The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all the lights listed above turn on.

200

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Canada Off The headlights and side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on and off automatically (when the “POWER” switch is in ON mode). The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all the lights listed above turn on.

2

When driving 201

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams. When the light switch is in position, the Automatic High Beam system will be activated. (P. 205) Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams. Release the lever to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped) AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input. AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

■ Deactivating AFS STEP 1

Press the menu switch. The multi-information display will change modes to electronic features control mode.

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards until AFS appears. 202

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

STEP 2

Press the “ENTER” switch to change to “OFF”. The “AFS OFF” indicator will be displayed. Each pressing of the switch turns “AFS” on and off.

Press the menu switch to change to the normal display.

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch. ■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. ■ Automatic light off system ● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds

after a door is opened and closed if the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)

● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the

“POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .

203

When driving

■ Daytime running light system

2

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes (if equipped)

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

204

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Automatic High Beam

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary.

■ Activating the Automatic High Beam system Turn the headlight switch to the STEP 1 position. 2

When driving

STEP 2

Push the lever away from you. The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

: If equipped 205

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ Turning the high beam on/off manually Switching to low beam Pull the lever to original position.

Switching to high beam Turn the light switch to position.

206

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second): ● Vehicle speed is above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h). ● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark. ● There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail lights turned on.

● Vehicle speed drops below approximately 20 mph (32 km/h). ● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark. ● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned on.

■ The Automatic High Beam can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is ON mode. ■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary. ■ Camera sensor detection information ● High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve. • When the vehicle is cut in front of by another. ● High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected. ● House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs

may cause the high beam to turn off.

207

When driving

If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off:

2

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on

or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles • Road conditions (wetness, ice, snow etc.) • The number of passengers and amount of baggage ● High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver. ● In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the sur-

rounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beam on or off manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

208

In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.) The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc. The windshield is cracked or damaged. The inside rear view mirror or camera sensor is deformed or dirty. Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights. Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or have are not aimed properly. When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.) When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror. The vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty. The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc. The Automatic High Beam indicator is flashing. The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner. The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ If the Automatic High Beam indicator flashes

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Temporary lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered. To lower the sensitivity, push and hold the “AUTO” button on the inside rear view mirror for 15 to 20 seconds, and release. The indicator light on the inside rear view mirror will flash to indicate that the sensitivity has been lowered. When the “POWER” switch is turned off, the sensitivity will be returned to its normal level.

2

■ Customization that can be configured at your Lexus dealer

When driving

The Automatic High Beam can be turned off.

209

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

NOTICE ■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system

Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.

● Do not touch the camera sensor. ● Do not subject the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor to a strong

impact.

● Do not disassemble the camera sensor. ● Do not spill liquid onto the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor. ● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of wind-

shield near the camera sensor.

● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor

will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehicles, etc.

● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the inside

rear view mirror and the camera sensor.

● Do not overload the vehicle. ● Do not modify the vehicle. ● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.

Contact your Lexus dealer.

210

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Fog light switch The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

U.S.A. Turns the front fog lights off Turns the front fog lights on

2

When driving 211

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Canada Turns the front fog lights off Turns the front fog lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

212

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Windshield wipers and washer Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster The wiper operation is selected as follows by turning the switch ring. When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper interval can be also adjusted. Off Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation

2

When driving

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

213

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. If the headlights are on, the headlight cleaners will operate once.

214

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped) When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed. When is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted as follows by turning the switch ring: Off Rain-sensing wiper operation Low speed wiper operation High speed wiper operation Temporary operation

2

When driving

Sensor sensitivity (high) Sensor sensitivity (low)

215

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.) If the headlights are on, the headlight cleaners will operate once.

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode: ● Intermittent wiper interval ● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention

wiper sweep occurs)

When low speed wiper operation is selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary. (However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode cannot be switched.) ■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops. An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield. If the wiper switch is turned to the position while the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated. 216

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ In extremely hot or cold weather (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The rain-sensing wiper operation will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 194F [90C]) or cold (at less than 5.0F [-15C]). If the windshield wipers cease operation while in AUTO mode, change to a mode other than AUTO. ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. 2

CAUTION rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. ■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. ■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

217

When driving

■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Rear window wiper and washer The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows: Off Intermittent window wiper operation Normal window wiper operation Washer/wiper dual operation Washer/wiper dual operation

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.

NOTICE ■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window. ■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is operated continually. ■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

218

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight cleaner switch

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the headlights.

2

When driving

■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.

NOTICE ■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

: If equipped 219

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Indicator Display Cruise control switch

■ Setting the vehicle speed STEP 1

Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

: If equipped 220

2-4. Using other driving systems

STEP 2

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. “SET” will be displayed.

2

When driving

■ Adjusting the set speed Increases the speed Decreases the speed Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained. Fine adjustment of the set speed can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it.

■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control Pulling the lever towards you cancels the constant speed control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

221

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in D or “4”, “5” or “6” range of S has been selected. ● Vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h). ■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. ■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle

speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h). ● VSC is activated. ■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

222

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● In heavy traffic

When driving

● On roads with sharp bends

2

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● On winding roads ● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● When your vehicle is towing anything

223

2-4. Using other driving systems

Dynamic radar cruise control Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

Indicator (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) Indicator (constant speed control mode) Display Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch Cruise control switch

■ Selecting cruise mode Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

224

2-4. Using other driving systems

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode: Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

The constant speed control mode indicator will come on.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode. ■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. “SET” will be displayed.

225

2

When driving

Switch to constant speed control mode. (Push and hold for approximately one second.)

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Adjusting the speed setting Increases the speed Decreases the speed Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed. Fine adjustment of the set speed can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it.

■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

226

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Preceding vehicle mark

Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows: Long Medium Short

2

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will be also displayed.

227

When driving

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you. Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Example of deceleration cruising When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

228

2-4. Using other driving systems

Example of follow-up cruising When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration When there no longer are vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead

Approach warning When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance. ■ Dynamic radar cruise can be set when ● The shift lever is in D. (Recommended)

Dynamic radar cruise control can also be set when the shift lever is in the S position and range “4”, “5”, or “6” has been selected.

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h). ■ Switching modes

The mode cannot be switched to constant speed control mode if vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode has been used. The mode also cannot be switched from constant speed control to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. Turn the system off by pressing the “ON-OFF” button, and turn it on again. ■ Accelerating

The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

229

2

When driving

When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way. ● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed. ● When the snow mode is set.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control

The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle

speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/ decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

230

Distance options

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Approximately 197 ft. (60 m)

Medium

Approximately 132 ft. (40 m)

Short

Approximately 98 ft. (30 m)

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected. Grille cover Radar sensor 2

Warning lights and messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 581) ■ Approach warning

In the following instances, there is a possibility that approach warning will not occur: ● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle speed ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed ● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set ● At the instant the accelerator is applied

231

When driving

■ Warning lights and messages for dynamic radar cruise control

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Certification

For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radio frequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION ■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc. ■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

232

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends

2

● On winding roads ● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and

down gradients

● At entrances to expressways ● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors

from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● Where a buzzer is heard often ● When your vehicle is towing anything ■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (P. 229) will not be activated, and an accident may result. ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles traveling at low speeds ● Vehicles that are not moving ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

233

When driving

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice and snow

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function

correctly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result: ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-

ing of the radar sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage

compartment etc.)

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow ● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable ● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly ■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly

Do not do the following to the sensor or grille as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident: ● Sticking or attaching anything to them ● Leaving them dirty ● Disassembling or subjecting them to strong shocks ● Modifying or painting them ● Replacing them with non-genuine parts ■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively: ● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area. ● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille. 234

2-4. Using other driving systems

Intuitive parking assist

The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is conducted. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

■ Types of sensors Front corner sensors Rear corner sensors Rear center sensors

2

When driving

■ Setting the intuitive parking assist mode Press the menu switch. STEP 1 The multi-information display will change modes to electronic features control mode.

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards until the intuitive parking assist mark appears in the multiinformation display.

: If equipped 235

2-4. Using other driving systems

STEP 2

Press the “ENTER” switch to change to “ON”. The intuitive parking assist indicator will be displayed. Each pressing of the switch turns the intuitive parking assist on and off. When on, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver that the system is operational.

Press the menu switch to change to the normal display. Display When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multiinformation display depending on the position and distance to the obstacle. Front corner sensor operation Rear corner sensor operation Rear center sensor operation

236

2-4. Using other driving systems

The distance display and buzzer When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. The site of the obstacle will flash (detection level 4 only).

■ Front corner sensors Detection level

Multi-information display

Buzzer

2

2.0 to 1.6 ft. (60 to 47.5 cm)

Medium

3

1.6 to 1.2 ft. (47.5 to 35 cm)

Fast

4

1.2 ft. (35 cm) or less

Continuous

Approximate distance to obstacle

Buzzer

2

1.6 to 1.2 ft. (50 to 37.5 cm)

Medium

3

1.2 to 0.8 ft. (37.5 to 25 cm)

Fast

4

0.8 ft. (25 cm) or less

Continuous

2

When driving

Approximate distance to obstacle

■ Rear corner sensors Detection level

Multi-information display

237

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear center sensors Detection level

238

Multi-information display

Approximate distance to obstacle

Buzzer

1

4.9 to 2.0 ft. (150 to 60 cm)

Slow

2

2.0 to 1.5 ft. (60 to 45 cm)

Medium

3

1.5 to 1.2 ft. (45 to 35 cm)

Fast

4

1.2 ft. (35 cm) or less

Continuous

2-4. Using other driving systems

Detection range of the sensors Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

2

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.

When driving

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when ● Front corner sensors:

• The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. • The shift lever is in a position other than P. • The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). ● Rear corner and center sensors: • The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. • The shift lever is in R.

239

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Sensor detection information ● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the

ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. • • • • • •

There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor. A sensor is frozen. A sensor is covered in any way. The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. • There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. • A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. • The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna. • Towing eyelets are installed. • A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. • The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb. • In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather. • A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed. In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are. ● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular

attention to the following obstacles: • • • • •

Wires, fences, ropes, etc. Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves Sharply-angled objects Low obstacles Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

■ If a message is displayed

P. 575 ■ Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

240

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

CAUTION ■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

2

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

When driving

● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

NOTICE ■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. ■ Conditions possibly indicating system malfunctions

If any of the following occurs, the system may be malfunctioning due to a sensor failure etc. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● The buzzer does not sound when the intuitive parking assist mode is set. ● The sensor operation display flashes and the buzzer sounds even when no obsta-

cle is detected.

● An area of the sensors is hit or subjected to a strong impact. ● Either bumper is hit. ● The sensor operation display remains on even though no buzzer sounds.

241

2-4. Using other driving systems

Electronically modulated air suspension The electronically modulated air suspension allows the driver to control vehicle height in order to adjust driving conditions. Select the desired height with the height selector switch.

Multi-information display Electronically modulated air suspension indicator Height control off button Height selector switch (driver’s side instrument panel)

Height selector switch (luggage compartment)

: If equipped 242

2-4. Using other driving systems

Selecting vehicle height ■ Height modes ● “HI” mode: For driving on bumpy roads 1.2 in. (30 mm) higher than the normal height “HI” mode cannot be selected when vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h). 2

● “N” mode: For ordinary driving

When driving

Normal height ● “LO” mode: For sporty driving Vehicle front: 0.8 in. (20 mm) lower than the normal height Vehicle rear: 0.2 in. (5 mm) lower than the normal height ● Luggage mode: For easy entry/exit and easy luggage loading/ unloading 1.2 in. (30 mm) lower than the normal height ■ Height selector switch Press the height selector switch for approximately 1 second. Driver's side instrument panel Higher Pressing this switch while the vehicle is in luggage mode changes the vehicle height to that of “N” mode.

Lower Pressing the switch while the vehicle is in “LO” mode changes the vehicle height to that of luggage mode.

243

2-4. Using other driving systems

Luggage compartment Higher Pressing this switch while the vehicle is in luggage mode changes the vehicle height to that of “N” mode.

Lower Pressing this switch while the vehicle is in “N” mode changes the vehicle height to that of luggage mode, not “LO” mode.

■ Electronically modulated air suspension indicator The indicator for the selected mode will come on. The indicator will flash while the vehicle height is being changed to the height of the selected mode.

Disabling the height control Press the height control off button while the vehicle is stopped. A message will appear on the multiinformation display, and vehicle height will be fixed in the current mode. When vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), the electronically modulated air suspension is reenabled automatically.

244

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Operating conditions

After stopping the hybrid system, the vehicle will remain lowered for a maximum of 60 seconds. ● Height selector switch (driver's side instrument panel)

• While the hybrid system is operating, any vehicle height mode can be selected. • Luggage mode can only be selected when the shift lever is in the P position. ● Height selector switch (luggage compartment)

● Height control off button

When the vehicle is stopped with the “POWER” switch in ON mode, vehicle height control can be disabled/re-enabled. ■ When changing vehicle height modes

Before operating the height selector switch to raise/lower the vehicle height, ensure that there are no objects in the surrounding area that could damage the vehicle. ■ When “N” mode is selected

During high speed driving, the vehicle height will automatically change to that of “LO” mode. ■ When “HI” mode is selected

The vehicle height will change to that of “N” mode when vehicle speed reaches 31 mph (50 km/h) or when vehicle speed has exceeded 19 mph (30 km/h) for approximately 10 seconds. Even if vehicle speed is then reduced to under 19 mph (30 km/h), height will not return to “HI” mode. ■ When “LO” mode is selected

The vehicle height will change to that of “N” mode when the hybrid system is restarted.

245

When driving

• When the hybrid system is operating and the shift lever is in the P position, any vehicle height other than “LO” mode can be selected. • When the “POWER” switch is turned off, the vehicle height can only be lowered (only the “” side of the switch can be operated). This switch can only be operated when the back door is open.

2

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When luggage mode is selected

If the vehicle begins to move while still in luggage mode, the vehicle will automatically change to “N” mode once speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Even if vehicle speed is reduced below 5 mph (8 km/h), the vehicle height will not automatically return to luggage mode. ■ Operating sound of the air suspension

When the vehicle height is lowered, such as when entering and loading the vehicle, or when the height selector switch is operated, the sound of the compressor operating or the mode changing may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Automatic leveling function

Regardless of the number of occupants and the luggage load, vehicle height in any mode is always adjusted to a fixed height by the automatic leveling function. ■ Vehicle height mode change time ● If the height control is operated continuously to lower the vehicle, the suspen-

sion air tank may become full, causing operation of the vehicle height lowering control to become slow.

● To protect the compressor, the system will only raise the vehicle for a total of

100 consecutive seconds. If it takes longer than this to reach the selected height, operation may be suspended shortly and then restart. However, it may not be possible to change the vehicle's height mode at this time.

■ The electronically modulated air suspension will not operate when

The vehicle height control may not be able to change modes when the vehicle runs over a high curb or other rugged surfaces where the suspension is stretched.

CAUTION ■ The electronically modulated air suspension must be disabled when

The electronically modulated air suspension must be disabled in the following situations as vehicle height may change, resulting in accidental damage: ● Any of the wheels is stuck in a ditch. ● It is necessary to jack up the vehicle. ● It is necessary to tow the vehicle with part of it lifted. ● When connecting/disconnecting a trailer

For safety, stop the hybrid system if necessary. 246

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE ■ “HI” mode ● “HI” mode should be used for off-road driving. As the vehicle's center of gravity is

higher in this setting, the vehicle may become unstable if an abrupt turn is made.

● Do not select “HI” mode when loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier. This

may result in a loss of control or vehicle rollover.

■ Do not select “LO” mode when driving on bumpy roads.

■ Automatic return to “N” mode

In the following situations, the height of the vehicle will automatically increase. Be careful in any place where overhead space is limited. ● The vehicle begins to move while still in luggage mode. ● The hybrid system is restarted while the vehicle is in “LO” mode. ■ Vehicle height while parked

If the temperature changes or the vehicle is parked for a long time, the vehicle height may decrease.

247

2

When driving

If the underbody of the vehicle touches a rugged road surface, the vehicle may be damaged. Also be careful when driving while the vehicle is automatically returning from luggage or “LO” mode to “N” mode.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Rear view monitor system (rear view mirror-attached type) The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is in the R position. • If the shift lever is shifted out of R, the screen is turned off. • The screen remains on for approximately 5 minutes.

: If equipped 248

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The rear view monitor system can be operated when

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode and the back door is fully closed. ■ Switching the screen on/off

When the screen is displayed, press the “AUTO” button on the inside rear view mirror to switch the screen on/off. Screen on: Green indicator comes on.

2

Screen off: Orange indicator comes on.

■ Displayed area

The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen. The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.

Corners of bumper

249

When driving

The auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror will revert to the screen on each time the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear view monitor system camera

In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly: ● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at

night.

● The temperature near the lens is

extremely high or low.

● Water droplets are on the camera lens

or humidity is high, such as when it rains.

● The camera has scratches or dirt on it ● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,

adheres to the camera lens.

● The sun or headlights are shining

directly into the camera lens.

■ Smear effect

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the vehicle body, is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* characteristic to the camera may occur. *: Smear effect  A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

250

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to

avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries: ● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear. ● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-

tances.

2

■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in

cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and

wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted

when the system is cold.

● As the camera is of water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or

modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coating to adhere

to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle's surroundings, as the displayed image

may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle with your own eyes and the vehicle's mirrors.

251

When driving

● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

■ Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

■ TRAC (Traction Control) Maintains drive power and helps to prevent any of the drive wheels from spinning when the vehicle is started or accelerated on a slippery road surface

■ Hill-start assist control P. 258

■ EPS (Electric Power Steering) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

■ Active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped) Reduces sway when cornering according to vehicle conditions such as steering wheel movement and vehicle speed, in order to maintain a stable vehicle posture

252

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management) Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, and EPS systems Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes and hybrid system output

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) P. 260 2

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or if any of the drive wheels spins, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/TRAC systems are operating. A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.

253

When driving

When the VSC/TRAC systems are operating

2-4. Using other driving systems

Disabling TRAC and/or VSC systems If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. ■ Turning off the TRAC system only To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the button. A message will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the button again to turn the system back on.

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped. A message will be shown on the multi-information display and VSC off indicator light will come on. Press the button again to turn the systems back on.

254

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, VSC, TRAC and brake assist ● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid system is

started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-

ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

2

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Reactivation of the TRAC /VSC systems

Turning off the hybrid system after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will automatically reactivate them. ■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases. ■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

255

When driving

• • • •

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on

a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road. ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-

tions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations: ● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ● When driving with tire chains ● When driving over bumps in the road ● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces ■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

256

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds. ■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary. Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■ Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system malfunction.

257

When driving

■ Replacing tires

2

2-4. Using other driving systems

Hill-start assist control Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.

To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped completely. A buzzer will sound once to indicate the system is activated. The slip indicator will also start flashing.

■ Hill-start assist control can be operated when ● The shift lever is in a position other than P. ● The parking brake is not applied. ● The accelerator pedal is not depressed. ■ Hill-start assist control ● While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically

applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high mounted stoplight turn on.

● Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is

released.

● If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake

pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operating conditions explained above have been met.

258

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Hill-start assist control buzzer ● When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once. ● In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the

buzzer will sound twice.

• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of releasing the brake pedal. • The shift lever is moved to P. • The parking brake is applied. • The brake pedal is depressed again. • The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3 minutes.

When driving

■ If the slip indicator comes on

2

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION ■ Hill-start assist control ● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not oper-

ate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice.

● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehi-

cle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended period of time, as doing so may lead to an accident.

259

2-4. Using other driving systems

Pre-Collision System

When the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision, safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged in an attempt to lessen vehicle damage.

■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat belts only) If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs. The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 92) However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the TRAC/VSC systems are disabled.

■ Pre-collision brake assist When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

Radar sensor The radar sensor detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.

: If equipped 260

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The pre-collision system is operational when ● Pre-collision seat belts linked to the radar sensor

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 3 mph (5 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle is greater than about 18 mph (30 km/h). • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Pre-collision seat belts in the event of sudden braking or skidding 2

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 18 mph (30 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 18 mph (30 km/h). • The brake pedal is depressed. ■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision ● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve ● When driving over a narrow iron bridge ● When there is a metal object on the road surface ● When driving on an uneven road surface ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn ● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front

When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it. ■ Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.

261

When driving

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 18 mph (30 km/h). • The system detects sudden braking or skidding. • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Pre-collision brake assist

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 566, 575) ■ Certification

For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio frequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

262

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards. ■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations: ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-

ing of the sensor

compartment etc.)

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane ■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively: ● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area. ● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.

263

When driving

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage

2

2-5. Driving information

Utility vehicle precautions This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity.

Utility vehicle feature ● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. ● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

264

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION ■ Utility vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious injury or damage to your vehicle: ● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. 2

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle

gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of

gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down

is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

265

When driving

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

2-5. Driving information

Off-road driving Your vehicle is not designed to be driven off-road. However, in the event that off-road driving cannot be avoided, please observe the following precautions to help avoid the areas prohibited to vehicles. ● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel. ● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property. ● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel. ● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads. ● Avoid driving on very steep, slippery roads and other surfaces, such as sand, where the tires are liable to lose traction. Your vehicle may not perform as well as conventional AWD on-road vehicles on these surfaces. ■ Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico: To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations. ● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments ● State Motor Vehicle Bureau ● Recreational Vehicle Clubs ● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

266

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION ■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious injury or damage to your vehicle: ● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in

dangerous places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could

jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim. mud, water or snow.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that there is no

grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped to the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds,

jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

NOTICE ■ To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the hybrid battery, hybrid system or other components does not occur. ● Water entering the engine compartment may cause severe damage to the hybrid

system. Water entering the interior may cause the hybrid battery stowed under the rear seats to short circuit.

● Water entering the hybrid transmission will cause deterioration in transmission

quality. The malfunction indicator may come on, and the vehicle may not be drivable.

● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature

failure, and may also enter the hybrid transmission case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities. 267

When driving

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,

2

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE ■ When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water. ■ Inspection after off-road driving ● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may

affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that

has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.

268

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible. ● Be sure all items are secured in place. ● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

When driving

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

2

Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650 lbs.) (5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 269

2-5. Driving information

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P. 628) Example based on your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (370 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows: 825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg) In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg) As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

270

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION ■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment: ● Receptacles containing gasoline ● Aerosol cans ■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

2

● Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle in the event of sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the items may

get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident:

• At the feet of the driver • On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) • On the luggage cover • On the instrument panel • On the dashboard ● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for

passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ Capacity and distribution ● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total

load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

271

When driving

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION ■ Roof luggage carrier precautions

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or more genuine Lexus cross rails or their equivalent. When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following: ● Place the cargo so that its weight is distrib-

Cross rails

uted evenly between the front and rear axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed

Roof rails

the vehicle’s overall length or width. (P. 628)

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage car-

rier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the

vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise the result may be a loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.

● If driving for long distances, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle

now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 165 lb. (75 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE ■ When loading cargo

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

272

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

■ Towing capacity (AWD models with towing package) 3500 lb. (1588 kg) Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

■ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 505)

CAUTION ■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

273

When driving

■ Towing capacity (2WD models and AWD models without towing package)

2

2-5. Driving information

Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations ● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Engine/power control unit coolant • Washer fluid ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires. Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions: ● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. ● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. ● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

274

2-5. Driving information

■ When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to the road conditions.

■ When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P and block the wheel under the vehicle without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size. Side chain: 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length 0.43 in. (10.8 mm) in width Cross chain: 0.15 in. (3.9 mm) in diameter 1.00 in. (25.3 mm) in length 0.54 in. (13.8 mm) in width Regulations on the use of tire chains Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

275

When driving

Selecting tire chains

2

2-5. Driving information

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains: ● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. ● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires. ● Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after

driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

CAUTION ■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. ● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires

being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. ■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,

or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. ● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle

handling.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is

maintained.

276

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

2

When driving 277

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing (AWD models with towing package) Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer. To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer's characteristics and operating conditions. The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kit etc.

278

2-5. Driving information

Weight limits Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits. ● The gross trailer weight must never exceed the following: 3500lb. (1588kg) ● The gross combined weight must never exceed the following:

2

9480lb. (4297kg)

● The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.

279

When driving

● The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label.

2-5. Driving information

Towing related term Towing related term

280

Meaning

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

Gross trailer weight

The sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

Towing capacity

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. Towing capacity is calculated considering the base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and occupants. Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, gross trailer weight include the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing.

Tongue load

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball.

2-5. Driving information

Trailer tongue load ● A recommended tongue load varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below. ● In order to ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions. The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the gross trailer weight, not exceeding 350 lb. (158 kg).

2

(Tongue load / Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)

The gross trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc. Gross trailer weight Tongue load

Hitch and tow hitch receiver ■ Hitch Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.

281

When driving

If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (900 kg), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity.

2-5. Driving information

■ Tow hitch receiver (if equipped) A tow hitch receiver installed under the rear bumper is rated for weight that does not exceed the vehicle's total towing weight.

Selecting a trailer ball Use the correct trailer ball for your application. Trailer ball load rating Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.

Shank length Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads.

Shank diameter Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

282

2-5. Driving information

Connecting trailer lights Without towing package: Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle's lights. Please take care to comply with your state's laws when installing trailer lights. With towing package: Use the 4 pin connector located under the rear bumper.

In case of over current, the auto cut-off function stops the power flowing to the trailer lights to prevent damage to the vehicle's electrical system. This function is activated when the rated current of any of the following trailer light circuit components is exceeded: ● Tail lights: maximum 7.8 A ● Stop/turn signal light (right): maximum 4.5 A ● Stop/turn signal light (left): maximum 4.5 A ■ When the auto current cut-off function is activated

If a trailer light does not come on due to the activation of the auto current cut-off function, the light system will need to be reset. Follow the reset procedure shown below. ● If a tail light does not come on, turn off the headlight switch. ● If the right-side stop/turn signal light does not come on, put the turn signal in the

off position or remove foot from the brake pedal.

● If the left-side stop/turn signal light does not come on, put the turn signal in the

off position or remove foot from the brake pedal.

If the emergency flashers do not operate, press the emergency flasher switch to turn them off. After the light system is reset, operate the light switches again to see if the lights operate normally. If the lights do not operate normally, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

283

When driving

■ Auto current cut-off function (vehicles with towing package)

2

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing tips Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing: ● Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance. ● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle. ● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident. ● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length. ● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces. ● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration. ● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turns. ● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a larger than normal turning radius.

284

2-5. Driving information

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize. ● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's hybrid system may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (P. 620) ● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the hybrid transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5

Apply the brakes and keep them applied. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. Apply the parking brake firmly. Shift into P and turn off the hybrid system.

285

When driving

● In order to maintain engine braking efficiency when driving on a long steep downgrade, do not use overdrive. Hybrid transmission shift range position must be in 4 in S mode.

2

2-5. Driving information

● When restarting after parking on a slope: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

With the hybrid transmission in the P position, start the hybrid system. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed. Shift into 3, 2, 1, or the R position (if reversing). Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

■ When connecting and disconnecting a trailer (vehicles with electrically modu-

lated air suspension) ● Connecting

STEP 1 Set the electronically modulated air suspension to LO mode. STEP 2 Press the height control off button to turn off the electronically modulated

air suspension. STEP 3 Turn off the “POWER” switch. STEP 4 Connect the trailer. STEP 5 Turn on the “POWER” switch. STEP 6 Press the height control off button again to turn on the electronically mod-

ulated air suspension. STEP 7 Set the electronically modulated air suspension to N mode.

● Disconnecting STEP 1 Set the electronically modulated air suspension to LO mode. STEP 2 Press the height control off button to turn off the electronically modulated

air suspension. STEP 3 Turn off the “POWER” switch. STEP 4 Set the supporting leg of the trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 4

in. (100 mm) STEP 5 Turn on the “POWER” switch. STEP 6 Press the height control off button again to turn on the electronically mod-

ulated air suspension.

286

2-5. Driving information

STEP 7 Wait until vehicle height is stabilized.

Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If the hitch does not disconnect, raise the hitch higher and repeat steps 2 through 7. ■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met: ● The vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (P. 505) ● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation. ● All trailer lights work.

2

● All lights work each time you connect them.

drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely loaded. ● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local

regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

■ Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an engine, hybrid transmission, and wheel bearings), Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer until it has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km). However, avoid full throttle acceleration. ■ Maintenance ● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to

the additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner's Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)

● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600

miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

287

When driving

● The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION ■ Trailer towing precautions ● Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could cause

an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Exceeding the towing capacity, GVWR or GAWR can cause an accident result-

ing in death or serious personal injuries.

■ To avoid accident or injury ● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle

weight and trailer tongue load capacities.

● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About 60% of

the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining 40% in the rear.

● For vehicles with an electronically modulated air suspension, set the vehicle

height to LO mode and turn off the electronically modulated air suspension to prevent the vehicle height from automatically changing.

● The tow hitch receiver installed on your vehicle must never be used on another

vehicle.

● Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is

lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause loss of control.

● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do

not make sudden downshifts.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too fre-

quently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

● Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.

288

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION ■ Hitches ● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement. ● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer. ● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease. ● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing

■ When towing a trailer ● If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (450 kg), trailer brakes are required.

Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's

braking effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the

trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

289

2

When driving

the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE ■ When installing a trailer hitch ● Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the

trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing,

wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

■ Safety chain

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation procedure, ask your Lexus dealer. ■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction.

290

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing (2WD models and AWD models without towing package) Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

2

When driving 291

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

292

2-5. Driving information

2

When driving 293

Interior features

3 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system..................................... 296 Rear window defogger switch...................................... 303 Windshield wiper de-icer.... 304 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system........................... 305 Using the radio ....................... 309 Using the CD player.............. 319 Playing MP3 and WMA discs ........................... 329 Operating an iPod® player......................... 339 Operating a USB memory player........... 347 Optimal use of the audio system......................... 356 Using the AUX adapter....... 359 Using the steering wheel audio switches....................... 361

294

Interior features 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth®

audio system .... 364

Using the Bluetooth® audio system ......................... 367 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player.... 372 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player.... 376 Bluetooth® audio system setup....................................... 383

3 3-6. Using the storage features List of storage features.......... 421 • Glove box.............................. 422 • Bottle holders/ door pockets ........................ 423 • Cup holders.......................... 424 • Console box ......................... 426 • Auxiliary boxes.................... 428 • Under tray............................. 429 3-7. Other interior features Sun visors ................................. 430 Vanity mirrors .......................... 431

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Hands-free system for mobile phones ..................... 384 Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)............ 388

Clock......................................... 432 Outside temperature display (vehicles without a navigation system).............. 433

Making a phone call .............. 396

Multi-display light control (vehicles without a navigation system).............. 434

Setting a mobile phone.......... 401

Power outlets .......................... 435

Security and system setup........................................ 407

Seat heaters and ventilators ............................. 438

Using the phone book............. 411

Armrest .................................... 440 Coat hooks ............................... 441

3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list...................... 418 • Interior lights ......................... 419 • Personal lights....................... 419

Floor mat .................................. 442 Luggage compartment features.................................. 443 Garage door opener ............ 447 Compass .................................. 453 295

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system Air outlet display Driver’s side temperature display

Fan speed control button/ “OFF” button

Driver's side temperature control buttons Air outlet selector button

Fan speed display Passenger’s side temperature display

Automatic mode button Dual mode button

Passenger’s side temperature control buttons

Cooling and dehumidification function Windshield defogger on/off button button Outside/recirculated air mode button

296

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic air conditioning system STEP 1

Press

.

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. STEP 2

Press “” on

to increase the temperature and “” to

decrease the temperature. When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

3

Interior features 297

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings manually ■ Basic setting STEP 1 To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan speed, press “” on to increase the fan speed and “OFF ” to decrease the fan speed. To turn the fan off, press and hold “OFF ” on STEP 2

To adjust the temperature setting, press “” on

.

to increase

the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature. When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. STEP 3

To change the air outlets, press

.

The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed. The air flow shown on the display indicates the following:

Air flows to the upper body.

298

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

3

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press

.

The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is pressed.

299

Interior features

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Defogging the windshield Defogging The air conditioning system operates automatically. Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is on.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets Front center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

Front side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

300

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

■ Air conditioning system settings

When the “POWER” switch is turned on, the air conditioning system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “POWER” switch was turned off.

3

● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic ● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer. ■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur: Immediately after the button is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow. ■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature. ■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged.

301

Interior features

key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When outside air temperature is below 32F (0C)

The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when pressed. ■ When the indicator light on

is

flashes

to turn off the cooling and dehumidification function and turn it on Press again. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

302

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window defogger switch Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Turns the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers on/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. 3

The “POWER” switch must be in ON mode. ■ The outside rear view mirror defoggers

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

CAUTION ■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very hot and burn you.

303

Interior features

■ Operating conditions

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Windshield wiper de-icer

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system Turns the windshield wiper deicer on/off The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

■ Operating conditions

The “POWER” switch must be in ON mode.

CAUTION ■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars, as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

: If equipped 304

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system (type A) CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio

3

Interior features 305

3-2. Using the audio system

Vehicles without a navigation system (type B) CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio

306

3-2. Using the audio system

Vehicles without a navigation system (type C) CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio

3

Interior features

Title

Page

Using the radio

P. 309

Using the CD player

P. 319

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

P. 329

Operating an iPod® player

P. 339

Operating a USB memory player

P. 347

Optimal use of the audio system

P. 356

Using the AUX adapter

P. 359

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 361

307

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Using mobile phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

CAUTION ■ Certification ● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. ● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes by yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. • This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. ■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

308

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the radio Type A

Channel category button

Preset station buttons

3

Frequency adjustment (AM/FM mode) and channel (SAT mode) AMFM/SAT knob mode buttons Traffic information button Seek button Radio text message button Scan button

309

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B

Channel category button

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

310

Preset station buttons

Frequency adjustment (AM/FM mode) and channel (SAT mode) AMFM/SAT knob mode buttons Traffic information button Seek button Radio text message button Scan button

3-2. Using the audio system

Type C

Preset tuning button

Preset station buttons

3

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

Frequency adjustment knob AM/FM mode buttons Seek button

Mute button

Scan button

311

3-2. Using the audio system

Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) STEP 1

Search for the desired stations by turning pressing “” or “” on

STEP 2

or

.

Press and hold the button (from be set to until you hear a beep.

to

) the station is to

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) ■ Scanning the preset radio stations STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the button again. ■ Scanning all the radio stations within range STEP 1 Press . STEP 2

All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each. STEP 2

312

or

When the desired station is reached, press the button again.

3-2. Using the audio system

RDS (Radio Data System) (type A and B) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information. ■ Receiving RDS broadcasts STEP 1

Press “” or “” on

during FM reception.

The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.

●“ROCK” ●“EASYLIS” (Easy listening) ●“CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)

3

Interior features

●“R & B” (Rhythm and Blues) ●“INFORM” (Information) ●“RELIGION” ●“MISC” (Miscellaneous) ●“ALERT” (Emergency messages) If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display. STEP 2

Press

, or “” or “” on

.

The radio seeks or scans for stations of the relevant program type.

313

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Displaying radio station names Press . ■ Displaying radio text messages Press twice. A text message is displayed when “MSG” is shown on the screen. If the text continues past the end of the display, hold until you hear a beep.

is displayed. Press and

XM® Satellite Radio (type A and B) ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio STEP 1

Press . The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed: “SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3”

STEP 2

Turn

to select the desired channel in all the categories or

press “” or “” on to select the desired channel in the current category. ■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from to ) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep. ■ Changing the channel category Press “” or “” on

314

.

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Scanning the XM® Satellite Radio channels ● Scanning the channels in the current category Press . STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button again. ● Scanning the preset channels STEP 1

Press and hold until you hear a beep. STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button again. ■ Displaying text information Press . STEP 1

3

The display will show up to 10 characters. Interior features

The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed: ● CH NAME ● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) ● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) ● CH NUMBER

315

3-2. Using the audio system

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased. ■ Reception sensitivity ● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may

adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.

● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually

changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear spoiler and the rear window. To

maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio

An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. ● XM® subscriptions

For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A.  Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987. Canada  Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987.

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using

, and the receiver's 8-character ID number will

appear. ● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

316

3-2. Using the audio system

■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

“ANTENNA”

The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all the free-to-air channels.

“NO SIGNAL”

“LOADING” “OFF AIR”

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio.

Interior features

“UNAUTH”

3

The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

317

3-2. Using the audio system

“-----”

“CH UNAVL”

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987. ■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following: ● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

318

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the CD player Type A

Repeat play button

Playback/Pause button

Eject button 3

Interior features

Load button “PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button CD selector button Track selector button

319

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B

Repeat play button

Playback/Pause button

Eject button Load button “PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button CD selector button Track selector button

320

3-2. Using the audio system

Type C

CD selector button Repeat play button

Eject button 3

Interior features

Load button Mute button Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button Track selector button

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

321

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading a CD ■ Loading a CD STEP 1 Press . “WAIT” is shown on the display. STEP 2

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a CD. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

■ Loading multiple CDs STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. “WAIT” is shown on the display. STEP 2

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a CD. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being inserted.

STEP 3

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert the next CD. Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs. To cancel the operation, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

322

3-2. Using the audio system

Ejecting CDs ■ Ejecting a CD To select the CD to be ejected, press “” or “” on or .

STEP 1

The selected disc number is shown on the display.

Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks ■ Selecting a track Press “” to move up or “” to move down using desired track number is displayed.

until the

■ Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep.

until

■ Scanning tracks STEP 1 Press . The first ten seconds of each track will be played. To cancel, press STEP 2

again.

Press the button again when the desired track is reached.

323

3

Interior features

Press and remove the CD. ■ Ejecting all the CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs. STEP 2

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a CD ■ Selecting a CD to play To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on ■ Scanning loaded CDs STEP 1 Press and hold

or

until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played. To cancel, press STEP 2

again.

Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.

Playing and pausing tracks (type A and B) To play or pause a track, press

.

Random playback ■ Current CD Press . Songs are played in random order. To cancel, press

■ All CDs Press and hold

again.

until you hear a beep.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order. To cancel, press

324

again.

.

3-2. Using the audio system

Repeat play ■ Repeating a track Press . To cancel, press

again.

■ Repeating all of the tracks on a CD Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display Press

.

3

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. ■ Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding until you hear a beep enables to display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been operated for more than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.

325

Interior features

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  CD title  Track title

3-2. Using the audio system

■ When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display

“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. “WAIT”:

This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press . If the CD still cannot be played back, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not be used. ■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. ■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-

ods of time

The discs may be damaged and may not play properly.

326

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.

(12 cm)

3

● Low-quality and deformed CDs

recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off

327

Interior features

● CDs with a transparent or translucent

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE ■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.

328

3-2. Using the audio system

Playing MP3 and WMA discs Type A Repeat play button Disc selector button

Playback/Pause button Folder selector buttons

Eject button

Load button 3

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

File selector knob Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button File selector button

329

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B Repeat play button Disc selector button

Playback/Pause button Folder selector buttons

Eject button

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

330

Load button

File selector knob Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button File selector button

3-2. Using the audio system

Type C Repeat play button Disc selector button

Eject button

Folder selector buttons

Load button 3

Interior features

File selector knob Mute button Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button File selector button

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

331

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 322, 323 Selecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 324 Selecting and scanning a folder ■ Selecting a folder one at a time Press or to select the desired folder. ■ Returning to the first folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. ■ Scanning the first file of all the folders STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played. STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep.

332

until

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning files ■ Selecting a file Turn

or

or press “” or “” on

to select the

desired file. ■ Scanning the files in a folder Press . The first ten seconds of each file will be played. To cancel, press

again.

When the desired file is reached, press

3

again.

Interior features

Playing and pausing files (type A and B) To play or pause a file, press

.

Random playback ■ Playing files from a folder in random order Press . To cancel, press

again.

■ Playing all the files from a disc in random order Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press

again.

333

3-2. Using the audio system

Repeat play ■ Repeating a file Press . To cancel, press

again.

■ Repeating all the files in a folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display Press

.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Folder no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name

334

3-2. Using the audio system

■ CD player protection feature

P. 325 ■ Display

P. 325 ■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. “WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press . If the CD still cannot be played back, contact your Lexus dealer. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.

3

■ Discs that can be used ■ Lens cleaners

P. 326 ■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-

ods of time P. 326

335

Interior features

P. 326

3-2. Using the audio system

■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows MediaTM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded. ● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) ● Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

336

3-2. Using the audio system

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used:

337

3

Interior features

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root) • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● Discs containing multi-session recordings As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played. ● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. ● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

P. 327 ■ CD player precautions

P. 328

338

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating an iPod® player Connecting an iPod® player enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting an iPod® player Slide the armrest while pulling up the lever, and lift the armrest. Remove the upper tray.

STEP 1

3

Remove the lower tray.

STEP 2

Interior features

Open the cover and connect an iPod® player using an iPod® cable.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Press

.

: If equipped 339

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel Playback/Pause button Go back button Repeat play button

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

340

iPod® menu/ Song selector knob Text button Playback button Shuffle playback button Song selector button

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a play mode

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Turning

to select iPod® menu mode. changes the play mode in the following order:

“PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS” “PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS” “AUDIOBOOKS” 3 STEP 3

Press

to select the desired play mode. Interior features 341

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Play mode list Play mode

First selection

Second selection

Third selection

Fourth selection

-

-

“PLAYLISTS”

Playlists select Songs select

“ARTISTS”

Artists select

“ALBUMS”

Albums select Songs select

-

-

“SONGS”

Songs select

-

-

-

-

Albums select Songs select -

“PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select “GENRES”

Genre select

Artists select

“COMPOSERS”

Composers select

Albums select Songs select

“AUDIOBOOKS” Songs select

-

Albums select Songs select

-

-

-

■ Selecting a list STEP 1

Turn

to display the first selection list.

STEP 2

Press

STEP 3

Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list. Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.

to select the desired item.

To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press .

342

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting songs Turn

or press “” or “” on

to select the desired song.

Playing and pausing songs To play or pause a song, press

.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep.

until

Interior features

Shuffle playback ■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order Press . To cancel, press

again.

■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press

again.

Repeat play Press

.

To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display Press

3

.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name 343

3-2. Using the audio system

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Pressing

to enter iPod® menu mode. changes sound modes. (P. 357)

■ About iPod®

iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. ■ iPod® player functions ● When an iPod® player is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod®

player mode, the iPod® player will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod® player that is connected to the system, certain func-

tions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

● While connected to the system, the iPod® player cannot be operated with its

own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.

■ iPod® player problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod® player, disconnect your iPod® player from the vehicle iPod® player connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod® player, refer to your iPod® player Owner's Manual. ■ Display

P. 325

344

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Routing portable audio device cables

When the cover is slid open, portable audio device cables can be pulled through the opening.

■ Error messages

“ERROR”:

This indicates a problem in the iPod® player or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod® player. This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.

“UPDATE”:

This indicates that the version of the iPod® player is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod® software to the latest version.

■ Compatible models ● iPod® 5th generation Ver. 1.2 or later ● iPod® nano 3rd generation Ver. 1.0 or later ● iPod® nano 2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or later ● iPod® nano Ver. 1.3 or later ● iPod® touch Ver. 1.1 or later ● iPod® classic Ver. 1.0 or later

iPhone®, iPod® mini, iPod® shuffle, iPod® photo and 4th generation and earlier models of iPod® are not compatible with this system. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: ● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999 ● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535 ● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535

345

3

Interior features

“EMPTY”:

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

Do not connect iPod® players or operate the controls.

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to iPod® players ● Do not leave iPod® players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod® player while it

is connected as this may damage the iPod® player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod® player

or its terminal.

346

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating a USB memory player Connecting a USB memory player enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting a USB memory player Slide the armrest while pulling STEP 1 up the lever, and lift the armrest. Remove the upper tray.

3

STEP 3

Open the cover and connect a USB memory player.

Interior features

STEP 2

Remove the lower tray.

STEP 4

Press

.

: If equipped 347

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel Playback/Pause button Repeat play button

Folder selector buttons

File selector knob Text button Search playback button Playback button Random playback button File selector button

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

348

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning a folder ■ Selecting folders one at a time Press or to select the desired folder. ■ Returning to the first folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. ■ Scanning the first file of all the folders STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played. STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again. 3

Selecting and scanning files

Turn

or press “” or “” on

to select the desired file.

■ Scanning the files in a folder Press . The first ten seconds of each file will be played. To cancel, press

again.

When the desired file is reached, press

again.

Playing and pausing files To play or pause a file, press

.

349

Interior features

■ Selecting a file

3-2. Using the audio system

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep.

until

Random playback ■ Playing files from a folder in random order Press . To cancel, press

again.

■ Playing all the files from a USB memory player in random order Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press

again.

Repeat play ■ Repeating a file Press . To cancel, press

again.

■ Repeating all the files in a folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display Press

.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name

350

3-2. Using the audio system

■ USB memory player functions ● Depending on the USB memory player that is connected to the system, the

device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

● If the USB memory player still does not begin operation after being discon-

nected and reconnected, format the memory.

■ Display

P. 325 ■ Routing portable audio device cables

3

P. 345 ■ Error messages

This indicates a problem in the USB memory player or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory player.

351

Interior features

“ERROR”:

3-2. Using the audio system

■ USB memory player ● Compatible devices

USB memory players that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback ● Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps) • File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows) • Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root) • Maximum number of files in a device: 65025 • Maximum number of files per folder: 255 ● MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows MediaTM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

352

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps) MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility

Interior features

• Compatible standards WMA Ver. 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR) ● File names

3

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

353

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. • When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory player mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played). ● Playback • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

Do not connect USB players or operate the controls.

354

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to USB memory players ● Do not leave USB memory players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory player

while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory

player or its terminal.

3

Interior features 355

3-2. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio system Type A and B

Displays the current mode Changes the following settings: • Sound quality and volume balance P. 357 The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce the best sound.

Type C

356

• Automatic Sound Levelizer on/off P. 358

3-2. Using the audio system

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance ■ Changing sound quality modes Press

or

.

Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order: “BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“ASL” ■ Adjusting sound quality Turning

or

adjusts the level.

Sound quality mode

Level

Turn counterclockwise

Turn clockwise

“BAS”

Bass*

-5 to 5

“MID”

Mid-range*

-5 to 5

Low

High

“TRE”

Treble*

-5 to 5

“FAD”

Front/rear volume balance

F7 to R7

Shifts to rear

Shifts to front

“BAL”

Left/right volume balance

L7 to R7

Shifts to left

Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

357

Interior features

Mode displayed

3

3-2. Using the audio system

Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off Turning or

or

clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning

counterclockwise turns off the ASL. ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle.

358

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX adapter This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Slide the armrest while pulling up the lever, and lift the armrest. Remove the upper tray.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Remove the lower tray.

STEP 3

Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

3

Interior features

STEP 4

Press

or

.

359

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. ■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device. ■ Routing portable audio device cables

P. 345

360

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Turns the power on, selects an audio source Increases/decreases volume Radio mode: Selects a radio station CD mode: Selects a track, file (MP3 and WMA) and disc Bluetooth® audio (type A and B):

3

mode

Interior features

Selects a track and album iPod® player mode (type A): Selects a song USB memory player mode (type A): Selects a file and folder Turning the power on Press

when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear a beep.

361

3-2. Using the audio system

Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped. Type A: FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod® or USB memory player AMFM1 Type B: FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player Bluetooth® audioAUXAMFM1 Type C: FM1FM2CD playerAUXAMFM1 Adjusting the volume Press “+” on ume.

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-

Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station STEP 1 STEP 2

Press to select radio mode. Press “” or “” on to select a radio station. To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on the button until you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song STEP 1 STEP 2

362

Press to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod® player or USB memory player mode. Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or song.

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting an album STEP 1 STEP 2

Press to select Bluetooth® audio mode. Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a folder STEP 1 STEP 2

Press to select USB memory player mode. Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a disc in the CD player STEP 1 STEP 2

Press to select CD mode. Press and hold “” or “” on

3

until you hear a beep.

Interior features

■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station

Press

again.

CAUTION ■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

363

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system

The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.

Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system Title Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Page P. 367

®

Operating a Bluetooth enabled portable player

P. 372

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player

P. 376

Bluetooth® audio system setup

P. 383

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the portable player is switched off ● If the portable player is not connected ● If the portable player’s battery is low ● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box ● If metal is covering or touching the portable player

: If equipped 364

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 410) ■ About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Compatible models

3

● Bluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.2) • AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3) Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player. ■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system

FCC ID: AJDK018 IC ID: 775E-K018 MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

365

Interior features

● Following profiles:

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ■ Caution while driving

Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

366

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system ■ Audio unit Display A message, name, number, etc. is displayed. Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.

If “BT” is not displayed, the Bluetooth® audio system cannot be used.

367

3

Interior features

Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) Selects items such as menu and number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item Bluetooth® connection condition

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Operating the system using voice commands By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without the need to check the display or operate

.

■ Operation procedure when using voice commands Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions. ■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: “Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

368

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player: STEP 1

Press

and select “BT•A MENU” using

STEP 2

Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using

. .

The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard. Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or STEP 4

.

Register a portable player name by either of the following methods: a. Select “Record Name” using

, and say the name to be

registered. b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered. A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. STEP 5

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard. STEP 6

Input the passkey into the portable player. Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player. 369

Interior features

STEP 3

3

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Guidance for registration completion is heard. If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® phone is heard. STEP 7

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or (Bluetooth® phone P. 386)

.

Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system First menu

Second menu

“BT•A Setup” “Setup”

“System Setup”

370

Third menu

Operation detail

“Pair Audio”

Registering a portable player

“Connect”

Selecting a portable player to be used

“Change Name”

Changing the registered name of a portable player

“List Audios”

Listing the registered portable players

“Set Passkey”

Changing the passkey

“Delete Audio”

Deleting a registered portable player

“Guidance Vol”

Setting voice guidance volume

“Device Name”

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

“Initialize”

Initializing the system

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

■ When using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine. Say the command correctly and clearly. ■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice ● When driving on rough roads ● When driving at high speeds ● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone ● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving

3

● Operating the system with

Interior features

● Registering a portable player to the system ■ Changing the passkey

P. 381

371

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player Type A Playback/Pause button Album selector buttons

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

372

BT·A menu knob Text button Search playback button Playback button Repeat play button Random playback button Track selector button

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Type B Playback/Pause button Album selector buttons

3

BT·A menu knob Text button Search playback button Playback button Repeat play button Random playback button Track selector button

373

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob Power Volume

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Selecting an album To select the desired album, press

or

.

Selecting tracks Press “” or “” on

to select the desired track.

Playing and pausing tracks To play or pause a track, press

.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep. Random playback Press

.

To cancel, press

again.

Repeat play Press

.

To cancel, press

again.

Scanning tracks Press

.

To cancel, press

374

again.

until

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Switching the display Press

.

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name

Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 361 ■ Bluetooth® audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.

3

■ Display

Interior features

P. 325 ■ Error messages

“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.

375

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:

■ Functions and operation procedures Pattern A To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or

:

● Registering a portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” ● Selecting a portable player to be used 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing the registered name of a portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered portable players 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

376

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Pattern B STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using

STEP 3

Select one of the following functions using a voice command or

to select “BT•A MENU”. .

. 3

● Registering a portable player “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”

Interior features

● Selecting a portable player to be used “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing the registered name of a portable player “Change Name” ● Listing the registered portable players “List Audio Players (List Audios)” ● Changing the passkey “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered portable player “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

377

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Registering a portable player Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or

,

and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 369) Selecting a portable player to be used STEP 1

Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used using .

378

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Pattern A STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

.

Pattern B STEP 3

Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using

.

If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the “POWER” switch is in either ACCESSORY or ON mode.

3

Changing the registered name of a portable player Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.

379

Interior features

STEP 1

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Pattern B STEP 2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using .

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using

, and

say the new name. STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

Listing the registered portable players Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or . The list of registered portable players will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”. Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become available: ● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

380

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Changing the passkey

STEP 1

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

Pattern B 3 STEP 2

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using

.

STEP 3

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press

again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary.

381

Interior features

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Deleting a registered portable player STEP 1

Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2

Select the desired portable player to be deleted using

.

If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard. STEP 3

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or (Bluetooth® phone P. 386)

■ The number of portable players that can be registered

Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.

382

.

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system setup ■ System setup items and operation procedures Pattern A To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or

:

(P. 407) Pattern B STEP 1

Press

to select “BT•A MENU”. 3

Select “System Setup” using

.

STEP 3

Select one of the following items using

Interior features

STEP 2

:

● Setting voice guidance volume “Guidance Vol” (P. 409) ● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Device Name” (P. 409) ● Initializing the system “Initialize” (P. 410)

383

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Hands-free system for mobile phones

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile phone without touching it. This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system Title

Page

Using the hands-free system

P. 388

Making a phone call

P. 396

Setting a mobile phone

P. 401

Security and system setup

P. 407

Using the phone book

P. 411

: If equipped 384

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the mobile phone is switched off ● If you are outside service range ● If the mobile phone is not connected ● If the mobile phone's battery is low ● If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box ● If metal is covering or touching the phone ■ When using the hands-free system ● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

3

● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear. ● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking. ● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads • When driving at high speeds • When a window is open • When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone • When the air conditioning is set to high ■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 410) ■ About Bluetooth® Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

385

Interior features

● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5) and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1. If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth® phone. ■ Certification for the hands-free system

FCC ID: AJDK018 IC ID: 775E-K018 MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ■ Caution while driving

Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.

386

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to mobile phones

Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone.

3

Interior features 387

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones) ■ Audio unit Display A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed. Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.

Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) Selects speed dials Selects items such as menu and number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item Bluetooth® connection condition If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used.

Reception level

388

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Steering wheel switches Volume During an incoming call: Adjusts the ring tone volume During an ongoing call: Adjusts the receiver volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.

■ Microphone

389

3

Interior features

Off-hook switch Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call Talk switch Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off (press and hold)

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Operating the system using voice commands By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate

.

■ Operation procedure when using voice commands Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions. ■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: “Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

390

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone: Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch. The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard. STEP 1

STEP 2

Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or

STEP 3

Register a phone name by either of the following methods:

3

, and say the name to be

registered. b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered. A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard. STEP 5

Input the passkey into the mobile phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard. If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® audio player is heard. 391

Interior features

a. Select “Record Name” using

.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

STEP 6

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or

.

(Bluetooth® audio player P. 365) Menu list of the hands-free phone system ■ Normal operation First menu

Second menu

Third menu

Operation detail

“Callback”

-

-

Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory

“Redial”

-

-

Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory

“Add Entry”

-

Adding a new phone number

“Change Name”

-

Changing the registered name in the phone book

“Delete Entry”

-

Deleting the registered data

“Phonebook” “Del Spd Dial”

-

Deleting speed dials

“List Names”

-

Listing the registered data

“Speed Dial”

-

Setting speed dials

392

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

First menu

Second menu “Security”

“Setup”

“Phone Setup”

Operation detail

“Set PIN”

Setting a PIN code

“Phbk Lock”

Locking the phone book

“Phbk Unlock”

Unlocking the phone book

“Pair Phone”

Registering the mobile phone to be used

“Connect”

Selecting a mobile phone to be used

“Change Name”

Changing the registered name of a mobile phone

“List Phones”

Listing the registered mobile phones

“Set Passkey”

Changing the passkey

“Delete Phone”

Deleting a registered mobile phone

“Guidance Vol”

Setting voice guidance volume

“Device Name”

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

“Initialize”

Initializing the system

393

3

Interior features

“System Setup”

Third menu

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Short cut key operation First menu

Second menu

Operation detail

“Dial XXX (name)”

-

Dialing a name registered in the phone book

“Phone book add Entry”

-

Adding a new phone number

“Phone book Change name”

-

Changing a registered name in the phone book

“Phone book Delete Entry”

-

Deleting the registered data

“Phone book List names”

-

Listing the registered data

“Phone book Set Speed Dial”

-

Setting speed dials

“Phone book Delete Speed Dial”

-

Deleting speed dials

“Dial XXX (number)”

-

Dialing by inputting a number

“Phonebook”

394

“Phonebook Unlock”

Unlocking the phone book

“Phonebook Lock”

Locking the phone book

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Automatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less. ■ When using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),  (star), and + (plus). Say the command correctly and clearly. ■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice ● When driving on rough roads ● When driving at high speeds

3

● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

Interior features

● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving ● Operating the system with ● Registering a mobile phone to the system ■ Changing the passkey

P. 404

395

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Making a phone call ■ Making a phone call ● Dialing by inputting a number “Dial by number” ● Dialing by inputting a name “Dial by name” ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory “Redial” ● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory “Call back” ■ Receiving a phone call ● Answering a phone call ● Refusing a phone call ■ Transferring a phone call ■ Call waiting ■ Using the call history memory ● Dialing ● Storing data in the phone book ● Deleting

396

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Dialing by inputting a number STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”. Press the talk switch and say the phone number. Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch. b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” using

.

Dialing by inputting a name STEP 1

STEP 3

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”. Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch when the desired name is read aloud. Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch. b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” using

.

Speed dialing STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3

Press the off-hook switch. Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered. Press the off-hook switch.

397

Interior features

STEP 2

3

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

When receiving a phone call ■ Answering a phone call Press the off-hook switch. ■ Refusing a phone call Press the on-hook switch. Transferring a phone call A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the mobile phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation of the phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch*1. c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2. *1:

This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the mobile phone to the system during a call.

*2:

While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from the system to the mobile phone.

Call waiting When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available: ● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the offhook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between calls.) ● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.

398

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Using the call history memory Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history memory: STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number stored in the incoming call history memory). Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed. b. Select the desired number using

3

.

mand or

.

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

399

Interior features

The following operations can be performed: Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice com-

STEP 3

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Call waiting ● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used. ● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service

provider.

■ Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories. ■ When talking on the phone ● Do not talk at the same time as the other party. ● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will

increase.

400

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Setting a mobile phone Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered mobile phones:

■ Functions and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or

:

● Registering a mobile phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Pair Phone” ● Selecting a mobile phone to be used 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Connect Phone (Connect)”

3

Interior features

● Changing the registered name of a mobile phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered mobile phones 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “List Phones” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered mobile phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Delete Phone”

401

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Registering a mobile phone Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or

, and perform the

procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 391) Selecting a mobile phone to be used STEP 1

Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or .

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be used using .

402

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Changing the registered name of a mobile phone

STEP 1

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

.

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using

, and

say the new name. STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

403

3

Interior features

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Listing the registered mobile phones Select “List Phones” using a voice command or

. The list of regis-

tered mobile phones will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”. Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become available: ● Selecting a mobile phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting a mobile phone: “Delete Phone” Changing the passkey

STEP 1

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

404

.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Pattern B STEP 2

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using

.

The number should be input 1 digit at a time. STEP 3

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press

again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary. 3

Deleting a registered mobile phone Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.

405

Interior features

STEP 1

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Pattern B STEP 2

Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using

.

If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard. STEP 3

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or (Bluetooth® audio player P. 365)

■ The number of mobile phones that can be registered

Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.

406

.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Security and system setup ■ Security setting items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or

:

● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number) 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN” ● Locking the phone book 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” ● Unlocking the phone book 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)”

: ● Setting voice guidance volume 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Guidance Vol” ● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Device Name” ● Initializing the system 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Initialize”

407

Interior features

■ System setup items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using

3

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Setting or changing the PIN ■ Setting a PIN STEP 1

Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Enter a PIN using a voice command or

When using

. .

, input the code 1 digit at a time.

■ Changing the PIN STEP 1

Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or

STEP 3

Enter a new PIN using a voice command or

When using

. .

.

, input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book STEP 1

Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or

408

.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

STEP 2

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN. b. Input a new PIN using

.

Setting voice guidance volume Select “Guidance Vol” using

STEP 2

Change the voice guidance volume. To decrease the volume: Turn

To increase the volume: Turn

3

.

Interior features

STEP 1

counterclockwise.

clockwise.

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

STEP 1

Select “Device Name” using

STEP 2

Turn

STEP 3

Select “Go Back” using

.

to display the Bluetooth® device address and name. to return to “System Setup”.

409

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Initializing the system

STEP 1

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using

STEP 2

Select “Confirm” again using

.

.

■ Initialization ● The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book • Outgoing and incoming call history • Speed dials • Registered mobile phone data • Security code • Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data • Passkey for the mobile phones • Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players • Guidance volume • Receiver volume • Ring tone volume ● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state. ■ When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used: ● Dialing by inputting a name ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory ● Using the phone book

410

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Using the phone book To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or

:

● Adding a new phone number 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Add Entry” ● Changing the registered name in the phone book 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered data 1. “Phonebook”  2. “List Names” 3

● Setting speed dials 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

Interior features

● Deleting the registered data 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Entry” ● Deleting speed dials 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” Adding a new phone number The following methods can be used to add a new phone number: ● Inputting a phone number using a voice command ● Transferring data from the mobile phone ● Inputting a phone number using ● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

411

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

■ Adding procedure STEP 1

Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or

.

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number: Inputting a telephone number using a voice command: STEP 2

STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. Transferring data from the mobile phone: STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for details on transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. b. Select the desired data using

412

.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Inputting a phone number using

:

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using STEP2-2 Input a phone number using

. , and press

again. Input the phone number 1 digit at a time. Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history: .

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command or

.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. b. Select the desired data using .

413

Interior features

STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or

3

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

STEP 3

Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Select “Record Name” using

STEP 4

and say the desired name.

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

In STEP 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.

Changing the registered name in the phone book

STEP 1

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2

414

Select the desired name to be changed using

.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using

and

say the new name. STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

Listing the registered data Select “List Names” using a voice command or

. The list of the reg3

Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following function will become available: ● Dialing: “Dial” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry” ● Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

415

Interior features

istered data will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”.

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Setting speed dials STEP 1

Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or .

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 STEP 3

Select the desired data using

.

Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

.

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

416

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Deleting the registered data

STEP 1

Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or

.

Pattern A STEP 2 Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

:

STEP 2

Select the desired data to be deleted using

.

Deleting speed dials STEP 1

Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or

STEP 2

.

Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

.

■ Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

417

3

Interior features

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone number. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Front personal lights (P. 419) Front interior lights (P. 419) Shift lever light (when the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode) Rear personal lights ( P. 419) Rear interior light Door courtesy lights Scuff lights (if equipped) Footwell lights Outer foot lights

418

3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights and personal lights

Interior lights Turns the lights on/off linked to door positions. Turns the lights on/off

Personal lights

3

Front Interior features

Turns the light on/off

419

3-5. Using the interior lights Personal lights

Rear Turns the light on/off

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to “POWER” switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/ off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ■ Customization

Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before the lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 656)

420

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

3

Interior features

Glove box Auxiliary boxes (if equipped) Bottle holders/door pockets Cup holders Console box Under tray

421

3-6. Using the storage features Glove box

Glove box The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button and locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. Opens Locks Unlocks

■ Power back door main switch (if equipped)

The power back door main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 66)

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

422

3-6. Using the storage features Bottle holders/door pockets

Bottle holders/door pockets Front The front door pockets can be opened and closed.

Rear

3

Interior features

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving (front door pockets)

Keep the door pockets closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holders

Do not place anything other than bottles in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

423

3-6. Using the storage features Bottle holders/door pockets and cup holders

NOTICE ■ When stowing a bottle

Put the cap on before stowing the bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders. The contents may spill.

Cup holders Front (type A) Press down and release the right side of the cup holder lid.

Front (type B) Press in and release the cup holder.

424

3-6. Using the storage features Cup holders

Rear Press down the button on the armrest.

■ Cup holder insert

The cup holder insert may be removed for cleaning.

3

Interior features

CAUTION ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Even when the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ■ To prevent burns

Put a lid on containers with hot liquids inside. ■ When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

425

3-6. Using the storage features Console box

Console box Slide the armrest while pulling up the lever, and lift the armrest.

■ Trays in the console box

Upper tray The tray slides forward/backward and can be removed.

Lower tray The tray can be removed.

426

3-6. Using the storage features Console box

CAUTION ■ Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

NOTICE ■ Trays

Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening and closing of the lid. 3

Interior features 427

3-6. Using the storage features Auxiliary boxes

Auxiliary boxes Overhead Press in the lid. This box is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.

Rear seat (if equipped) STEP 1

Pull down the armrest.

STEP 2

Pull up the lever to release the lock and lift the armrest.

428

3-6. Using the storage features Auxiliary boxes and under tray

CAUTION ■ Items that should not be left in the auxiliary box (overhead type)

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the box. If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or crack. ■ Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving. Items stored in the auxiliary box may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop.

Under tray

3

Interior features

CAUTION ■ Items unsuitable for the under tray

Observe the following precautions when putting items in the under tray. Failure to do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distraction, resulting in an accident. ● Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out. ● Do not stack items in the tray higher than the tray's edge. ● Do not put items in the tray that may protrude over the tray's edge.

429

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down. To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side. To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

430

3-7. Other interior features

Vanity mirrors Slide the cover to open. The light turns on when the cover is opened.

NOTICE 3

■ When not in use ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

431

Interior features

Keep the vanity mirror closed.

3-7. Other interior features

Clock The clock is displayed when the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. Perform the following steps to adjust the clock.

Without a navigation system Adjusts the hours Adjusts the minutes

With a navigation system Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

432

3-7. Other interior features

Outside temperature display (vehicles without a navigation system) The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

3

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. ■ Display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change: ● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25

km/h])

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a

garage, tunnel, etc.)

433

Interior features

■ If the temperature does not appear

3-7. Other interior features

Multi-display light control (vehicles without a navigation system) The brightness of the multi-display can be adjusted to four levels.

Press and release the “DISP” button until the brightness of the display is adjusted to the desired level.

■ Instrument panel linked brightness control

When the headlight switch is turned on, the brightness of the multi-display will be reduced in accordance with the brightness of the instrument panel. (P. 183)

434

3-7. Other interior features

Power outlets The power outlets can be used for the following components.

12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A. 120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W. Inside the console (12 V) STEP 1

Slide the armrest while pulling up the lever, and lift the armrest. Remove the upper tray.

3

Remove the lower tray.

Interior features

STEP 2

Luggage compartment (12V)

435

3-7. Other interior features

On the back surface of the console (120 VAC*) Main switch To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch. Power outlet socket

*: If equipped

■ Routing accessory device cables

When the cover is slid open, accessory device cables can be pulled through the opening.

■ The power outlets can be used when

12 V The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

120 VAC The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. 436

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the power outlets

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. 12 V: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. 120 VAC: Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W. If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC)

The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W: ● Appliances with high initial peak wattage ● Measuring devices that process precise data ● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

437

Interior features

Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

3

3-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters and ventilators The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.

■ Seat heaters Turns the seat heater on The indicator light comes on. The higher the number is, the warmer the seat becomes.

■ Seat heaters/ventilators Turns the seat heater on The indicator light comes on. The higher the number is, the warmer the seat becomes.

Blows air from the seat The indicator light comes on. The higher the number is, the stronger the airflow becomes.

■ Operating condition

The “POWER” switch is in ON mode. ■ When not in use

Set the knob at “0”. The indicator light turns off.

: If equipped 438

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION ■ Burns ● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on

to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • •

Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

439

Interior features

NOTICE

3

3-7. Other interior features

Armrest Pull the armrest down for use.

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

440

3-7. Other interior features

Coat hooks To use the coat hook, push it in.

CAUTION 3

■ Items that must not be hung on the hook

441

Interior features

Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury.

3-7. Other interior features

Floor mat Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.

Secure the floor mat using the hooks provided.

CAUTION ■ When inserting the floor mat

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident. ● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct

side faces upward.

● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.

442

3-7. Other interior features

Luggage compartment features ■ Cargo hooks Raise the hook to use. The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

■ Auxiliary boxes Pull the strap upwards when lifting the cover up.

3

Interior features 443

3-7. Other interior features

■ Luggage covers STEP 1

STEP 2

Attach the hooks to the hook brackets on the rear seat seatback.

Pull out the luggage cover and hook it onto the anchors.

Removing the luggage covers Front luggage cover Press the buttons to remove the luggage cover.

444

3-7. Other interior features

Rear luggage cover STEP 1

Detach the outer clips of the rear luggage cover from the back door.

3

Detach the inner clips of the rear luggage cover from the back door.

■ Installing the rear luggage cover ● Ensure that the luggage cover is in the proper installation position.

Push the clips of the rear luggage cover into the indentions on the back door until they are locked into place.

● Check that the rear luggage cover is securely attached.

445

Interior features

STEP 2

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION ■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.

446

3-7. Other interior features

Garage door opener The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices. The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink.

Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners) The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Interior features

Indicator Buttons

■ Programming the HomeLink STEP 1

3

Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink control buttons. Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.

447

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 2

Press and hold one of the HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons. If the HomeLink indicator light comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button” instructions. (P. 450)

STEP 3

Test the HomeLink operation by pressing the newly programmed button. If a HomeLink button has been programmed for a garage door, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type if the HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is of the rolling code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

STEP 4

448

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons.

3-7. Other interior features

■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners) If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the steps listed below. STEP 1

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener motor. Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

STEP 2

Press the training button. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

 STEP 3 Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button for

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink. STEP 4

Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.

STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

Press and hold the selected HomeLink button. Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed. When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons. 449

Interior features

2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.

3

3-7. Other interior features

Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. STEP 5

■ Reprogramming a button The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button” instructions. Operating HomeLink Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator light should turn on. The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink button Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash.

450

3-7. Other interior features

Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs) Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory.

■ Before programming

3

● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

the HomeLink button.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

451

Interior features

● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. ■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

452

3-7. Other interior features

Compass The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

■ Operation To turn the compass on or off, press “AUTO” for more than 3 seconds.

3

■ Displays and directions Direction

“N”

North

“NE”

Northeast

“E”

East

“SE”

Southeast

“S”

South

“SW”

Southwest

“W”

West

“NW”

Northwest

Interior features

Display

453

3-7. Other interior features

Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending on the geographic position of the vehicle. If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.

■ Deviation calibration STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle. Press and hold “AUTO”. STEP 2 A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

454

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 3

Referring to the map above, press “AUTO” to select the number of the zone you are in. If the direction is displayed for several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.

■ Circling calibration If “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until a direction is displayed.

3

Interior features

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: ● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. ● The vehicle is on an inclined surface. ● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-

ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near

the inside rear view mirror.)

● The 12-volt battery has been disconnected. ● A door is open.

455

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION ■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. ■ When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE ■ To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction. ■ To ensure normal operation of the compass ● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's

magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,

etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

456

Maintenance and care 4-1. Maintenance and care

4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............. 458

Do-it-yourself service precautions............................. 471

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior............... 461

Hood........................................... 474 Positioning a floor jack .......... 475 Engine compartment ............ 477

4-2. Maintenance

12-volt battery ........................ 489

Maintenance requirements ........................ 464

Tires............................................ 496

General maintenance .......... 466

Wheels....................................... 510

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs................................ 470

Air conditioning filter ............ 512

Tire inflation pressure........... 505

Electronic key battery........... 515 Checking and replacing fuses .......................................... 517 Headlight aim ......................... 533 Light bulbs................................ 536

457

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. ● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Wipe away any water. ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes ● Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors. • Turn off the power back door system (if equipped). ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. ■ High pressure car washes ● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the

windows and the air suspension unit (if equipped).

● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed

properly.

458

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. ■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. ■ To prevent deterioration and body corrosion ● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• • • •

After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface • After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled by dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

459

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

4

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE ■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces

Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights ● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first. ■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to the off position. Off

460

If the wiper switch is in , the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. ■ Cleaning the leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. 4

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Maintenance and care

■ Cleaning the synthetic leather areas ● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. ● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. ● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

461

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. ■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION ■ Water in the vehicle ● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor and in the hybrid

battery (traction battery) air vents or in the luggage compartment. Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P. 124) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

462

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents

Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces: ● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or

acidic solutions, dye, or bleach

● Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol ■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces: ● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park

the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as

they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window ● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to

the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

463

Maintenance and care

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

4

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends performing the following maintenance:

■ General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer. ■ Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

464

4-2. Maintenance

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer ● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been

performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION ■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. ■ Handling of the 12-volt battery ● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-

ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

4

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-

● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead

compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 489)

465

Maintenance and care

nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment Items

466

Check points

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (P. 486)

Coolant

Is the coolant at the correct level? (P. 483)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct level? (P. 479)

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Radiator/condenser/hoses

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (P. 485)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid? (P. 487)

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior Items

Check points

12-volt battery

Check the indicator and connections. (P. 489)

Accelerator pedal

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly? • Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? (P. 636) • Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? (P. 636)

Head restraints

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights come on? • Are the headlights aimed correctly? (P. 533)

Maintenance and care

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied. • The brakes should work effectively. • The brake pedal should not feel spongy. • The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

4

467

4-2. Maintenance

Items

468

Check points

Parking brake

• Does the parking brake lever or pedal move smoothly? • When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly? • The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly? • Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play? • There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Hybrid transmission “Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior Items

Check points • Do the doors operate smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct? • The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn. • Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • The wheel nuts should not be loose.

CAUTION ■ If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

469

4

Maintenance and care

Doors

4-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. ■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations: ● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. ● When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. ■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

470

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections. Items

Parts and tools

Brake fluid level

(P. 486)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Engine/power control unit coolant level (P. 483)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. For the U.S.A. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

4

Maintenance and care

12-volt battery condition (P. 489)

• Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

471

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items

Parts and tools

Engine oil level

(P. 479)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses

(P. 517)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Tire inflation pressure

(P. 505)

• Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source

Headlight aim

(P. 533)

• Phillips-head screwdriver

Radiator and condenser (P. 485)

Washer fluid

472

(P. 487)

 • Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions: ■ When working on the engine compartment ● Make sure that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY” indicator

are both off.

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt. ● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold,

etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine

compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flam-

mable.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE ■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

473

4

Maintenance and care

Be sure the “POWER” switch is off. With the “POWER” switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 485)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. STEP 1

Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly.

STEP 2

Pull up the hood catch and lift the hood.

CAUTION ■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

474

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning a floor jack When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

■ Front

■ Rear

4

Maintenance and care 475

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury: ● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as

the one shown in the illustration.

● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. ● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported

only by the floor jack. Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.

● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. ● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the

shift lever to P.

● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. ● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the

floor jack.

● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension (if equipped):

Be sure to turn off the height control and stop the hybrid system. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change in the automatic leveling function. (P. 242)

476

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment

4

Engine coolant reservoir (P. 483) Radiator (P. 485) Condenser (P. 485) Electric cooling fans Power control unit coolant radiator (P. 485) Washer fluid tank (P. 487)

Maintenance and care

Brake fluid reservoir (P. 486) Engine oil filler cap (P. 479) Engine oil level dipstick (P. 479) Power control unit coolant reservoir (P. 483) Fuse boxes (P. 517)

477

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover ■ Removing the engine compartment covers Outside

Front

■ Installing the clips

478

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the hybrid system, wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. Hold a rag under the end and pull STEP 2 the dipstick out.

4 STEP 3

STEP 5 STEP 6

479

Maintenance and care

STEP 4

Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. Low Full

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Engine oil selection Oil quantity (Low Full) Items STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3

480

P. 632 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.) Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Engine oil consumption ● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of

the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre-

quent acceleration and deceleration.

● A new engine consumes more oil. ● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may

have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000

km)

● If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles

(1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer.

■ After changing the engine oil (USA only)

The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedure: STEP 1 Display the trip meter “A” (P. 183), then turn the “POWER” switch off. STEP 2 While pressing the “ODO/TRIP” button, turn the “POWER” switch to

4

ON mode. Keep the “ODO/TRIP” button pressed for about 5 seconds. The resetting procedure is complete when “000000” in the trip meter flashes once and the message in the multiinformation display disappears.

481

Maintenance and care

STEP 3

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ Used engine oil ● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin

disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-

pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE ■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis. ■ When replacing the engine oil ● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. ● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

482

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine and hybrid system are cold. Engine coolant reservoir Reservoir cap “FULL” line “LOW” line If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (P. 634)

4

Maintenance and care 483

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Power control unit coolant reservoir Reservoir cap “FULL” line “LOW” line If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (P. 634)

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C]) For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling systems.

484

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ When the engine and hybrid system are hot

Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

NOTICE ■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damaging to parts or paint. 4

Radiator and condenser

CAUTION ■ The radiators and condenser may be hot after driving

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and burn you.

485

Maintenance and care

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

■ Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item. Fluid type Items

486

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 Clean funnel

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION ■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE 4

■ If the fluid level is low or high

Washer fluid If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

487

Maintenance and care

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, may be a serious problem.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the hybrid system etc.

NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces. ■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

488

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

12-volt battery ■ Location The 12-volt battery is located on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment.

■ Removing the 12-volt battery cover Vehicles with a compact spare tire Pull the lever upward to fold STEP 1 back the front part of the deck board. 4

Pull the folded deck board upright.

489

Maintenance and care

STEP 2

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

490

Pull on the attached hook to extend the string.

Use the hook to secure the deck board as shown in the illustration.

After removing the clips, remove the 12-volt battery cover.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire STEP 1

STEP 2

Pull the lever upward to fold back the front part of the deck board.

Pull on the attached hook to extend the string.

4

Maintenance and care

STEP 3

Use the hook to secure the deck board as shown in the illustration.

491

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 4

After removing the clips, remove the 12-volt battery cover.

■ Exterior Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp

■ Installing the 12-volt battery cover Install the 12-volt battery cover with the clips.

492

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging: ● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-

necting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

The hybrid system may not start. Follow one or both of the following procedures: ● After opening and closing the driver’s door, wait 10 seconds and then attempt to

start the hybrid system. (If the system does not start the first time, repeat the procedure.)

● With the shift lever in P and the “POWER” switch off, open and close any door

and then attempt to start the hybrid system.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact your Lexus dealer.

4

Maintenance and care 493

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. ● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery. ■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation. ■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

494

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for the RX450h. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion. For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE ■ When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

4

Maintenance and care 495

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

■ Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation Vehicles with a compact spare tire Rotate the tires in the order shown.

Front

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire Rotate the tires in the order shown.

Front

496

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The tire pressure warning system Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 568) Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 499) 4

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

● When changing the tire size When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

497

Maintenance and care

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: ● When tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing travelling speed or load weight

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “POWER” switch off. Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. STEP 2

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 637) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

STEP 3 STEP 4

STEP 5

498

Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode. Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset button until the tire pressure warning light flashes slowly 3 times.

Wait for a few minutes with the “POWER” switch on and then turn the “POWER” switch off.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Registering ID codes The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if: ● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the

fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage.

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or

location of a cut or other damage.

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. ■ Replacing tires and wheels

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

499

4

Maintenance and care

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light flashes for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 643)

■ Tire types

1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 274)

500

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level. ■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again. ■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● When operating the tire pressure warning reset button, the tire pressure warn-

ing light does not flash 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light

flashes for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

501

4

Maintenance and care

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

TPMS Transmitter FCC ID: PAXPMV107J IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J TPMS Receiver

FCC ID: HYQ13BCX IC ID: 1551A-13BCX

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

502

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ Tire pressure warning system operation

The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs. ■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix

tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. ● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). ● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. ● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

4

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

503

Maintenance and care

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. ■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. ■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

504

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure ■ Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 643) Type A

4

Maintenance and care 505

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type B

506

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

STEP 5

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.

507

4

Maintenance and care

STEP 6

Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the gauge graduations. If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Put the tire valve cap back on.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ● Reduced fuel efficiency ● Reduced driving comfort and tire life ● Reduced safety ● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Instructions for checking tire pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation

pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

508

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury: ● Excessive wear ● Uneven wear ● Poor handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Poor sealing of the tire bead ● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation ● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE 4

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

509

Maintenance and care

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as possible.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Lexus does not recommend using the following: ● Wheels of different sizes or types ● Used wheels ● Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ Aluminum wheel precautions ● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. ● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. ● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 497) 510

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE ■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters ● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.

4

Maintenance and care 511

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode. (P. 299) The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode. STEP 2

Turn the “POWER” switch off.

STEP 3

Open the glove box. Lift and remove the partition.

STEP 4

Remove the glove box cover.

STEP 5

Remove the filter cover.

512

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 6

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one. The “UP” mark shown on the filter should be pointing up.

■ Cleaning method If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the underside. Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar).

4

Maintenance and care

If an air gun is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer.

■ Checking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner's Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.) ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

513

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the system ● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed. ● When cleaning the filter, do not clean with water.

514

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■ You will need the following items: ● Flathead screwdriver ● Small Phillips-head screwdriver ● Lithium battery (CR1632) ■ Replacing the battery STEP 1

Take out the mechanical key.

4

Remove the cover.

STEP 3

Remove the depleted battery.

Maintenance and care

STEP 2

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

515

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery ● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance

shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufac-

turer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. ■ If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur: ● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will

not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced. ■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)

The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you.

CAUTION ■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

NOTICE ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: ● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

516

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the “POWER” switch off. STEP 2 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 478) STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment (type A fuse box) Push the tab in and lift the lid off. STEP 1

Engine compartment (type B fuse box) Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

4

Maintenance and care 517

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment (type C fuse box) Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Driver's side instrument panel Remove the lid.

Luggage compartment (type A fuse box)

518

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Luggage compartment (type B fuse box) Remove the terminal cover.

STEP 4

STEP 5

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” for details about which fuse to check. (P. 522) Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. 4

Maintenance and care

Check if the fuse has blown. Type A

STEP 6

Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

519

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type D Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

520

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type E Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type F Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. 4

Maintenance and care 521

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings ■ Engine compartment (type A fuse box)

Fuse

522

Ampere

Circuit

1

PCU

15 A

Hybrid system

2

IGCT NO. 2

10 A

Hybrid system

3

IGCT NO. 3

10 A

Hybrid system

4

INV W/P

10 A

Hybrid system

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

1

SPARE

120 A

2

RR DEF

50 A

Rear window defogger

3

AIR SUS

50 A

Electronically modulated air suspension system

4

HTR

50 A

Air conditioning system

5

ECB NO. 1

50 A

Brake system, vehicle stability control, vehicle dynamics integrated management, meters and gauges

6

RDI FAN NO. 1

40 A

Electric cooling fans

7

RDI FAN NO. 2

40 A

Electric cooling fans

8

H-LP CLN

30 A

Headlight cleaner

9

PBD

30 A

Power back door system

10

HV R/B NO. 1

30 A

PCU, IGCT NO. 2, IGCT NO. 3, INV W/P

4

Maintenance and care

523

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

11

PD

50 A

Daytime running light system, A/F, H-LP RH HI, H-LP LH LO, H-LP RH LO, H-LP LH HI, HORN, S-HORN, multiplex communication system, multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

12

ECB NO. 2

50 A

Brake system

13

HV R/B NO. 2

80 A

ECB MAIN 1, ECB MAIN 2, A/C W/P, BATT FAN, OIL PMP

14

DCDC

150 A

FUEL OPN, DR LOCK, OBD, RR FOG, S/ROOF, INVERTER, ECUIG1 NO. 1, ECU-IG1 NO. 2, PANEL, GAUGE NO. 1

15

AMP1

30 A

Audio system

16

EFI MAIN

30 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO. 2

17

AMP2

30 A

Audio system

18

IG2 MAIN

30 A

Starter system, IGN, GAUGE NO. 2, ECU IG2

19

IP JB

25 A

Power door lock system

20

STR LOCK

20 A

Starter system

21

RAD NO. 3

15 A

Meters and gauges, instrument panel lights, navigation system, audio system

22

HAZ

15 A

Emergency flashers

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

23

524

ETCS

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

24

RAD NO. 1

10 A

Audio system

25

AM2

7.5 A

Starter system Air conditioning system, front passenger occupant classification system, starter system, electric power steering system

ECU-B NO. 2

7.5 A

27

MAYDAY/TEL

7.5 A

28

IMMOBI

7.5 A

29

ECB MAIN NO. 3

15 A

Brake system

30

IGN

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, brake system, SRS airbag system

10 A

Vanity mirror lights, luggage compartment lights, interior lights, personal lights

10 A

Interior lights, personal lights, tilt and telescopic steering, multiplex communication system, meters and gauges, power windows, driving position memory system, power seats, power back door, head-up display, starter system, air conditioning system, power door lock system

31

32

DOME

ECU-B NO. 1

33

EFI NO. 1

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

34

WIP-S

7.5 A

Windshield wipers and washer

35

AFS

7.5 A

Adaptive front-lighting system 525

4

Maintenance and care

26

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

36

BK/UP LP

7.5 A

Back-up lights

37

HEATER NO. 2

7.5 A

Air conditioning system, AWD system

38

ECU IG1

10 A

Adaptive front-lighting system, headlight cleaner, cooling fan, cruise control, electronically modulated air suspension system, vehicle stability control, vehicle dynamics integrated management, brake system

39

EFI NO. 2

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

40

F/PMP

15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

41

DEICER

25 A

Windshield wipers and washer

42

STOP

7.5 A

Vehicle stability control, vehicle dynamics integrated management, high mounted stoplight

43

TOWING BATT

20 A

Trailer battery

44

TOWING

30 A

Trailer lights

45

FILTER

10 A

Condenser

46

IG1 MAIN

30 A

ECU IG1, BK/UP LP, HEATER NO. 2, AFS

47

H-LP RH HI

15 A

Right-hand headlight (high beam)

48

H-LP LH HI

15 A

Left-hand headlight (high beam)

49

BIXENON

10 A

Discharge headlight

50

H-LP RH LO

15 A

Right-hand headlight (low beam)

51

H-LP LH LO

15 A

Left-hand headlight (low beam)

526

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

52

HORN

10 A

Horn

53

A/F

20 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

54

S-HORN

7.5 A

Security horn

■ Engine compartment (type C fuse box)

4

Ampere

Maintenance and care

Fuse

Circuit

1

ECB MAIN NO. 1

10 A

Brake system

2

ECB MAIN NO. 2

10 A

Brake system

3

BATT FAN

15 A

Battery cooling fan

4

OIL PMP

10 A

Hybrid system

5

A/C W/P

10 A

Air conditioning system

527

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Driver’s side instrument panel

Fuse 1

Circuit

15 A

Power outlet

2

ECU-ACC

10 A

Navigation system, outside rear view mirror, multiplex communication system, multi-information display, headup display

3

CIG

15 A

Power outlet

4

RADIO NO. 2

7.5 A

Audio system, power outlet

5

GAUGE NO. 1

10 A

Emergency flashers, navigation system, head-up display

10 A

Outside rear view mirror, windshield wipers and washer, seat heaters, starter system, power outlet, moon roof

6

528

P/POINT

Ampere

ECU-IG1 NO. 3

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

7

ECU-IG1 NO. 1

10 A

Multiplex communication system, electric power steering system, shift lock control system, tilt and telescopic steering, starter system, hybrid transmission system, power back door, hybrid system, tire pressure warning system

8

S/ROOF

30 A

Moon roof

9

FUEL OPN

7.5 A

Fuel filler door opener

10

PSB

30 A

Pre-collision seat belt

11

TI & TE

30 A

Tilt and telescopic steering system

12

DR LOCK

10 A

Power door lock system

13

FR FOG

15 A

14

P-SEAT LH

30 A

15

INVERTER

20 A

16

RR FOG

7.5 A

17

D/L ALT B

25 A

Multiplex communication system

18

HEATER

10 A

Air conditioning system

10 A

Air conditioning system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS airbag system, multi-information display, capacitor

10 A

Switch illumination, navigation system, height control system, headlight cleaner, windshield wiper de-icer, seat heater, power back door, audio system, multi-information display, air conditioning system

20

ECU-IG1 NO. 2

PANEL

529

Maintenance and care

19

4

Power seat (left-side)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

21

TAIL

10 A

Position lights, tail lights, license plate lights, towing converter

22

AIR SUS

20 A

Electronically modulated air suspension system

23

P-SEAT RH

30 A

Power seat (right-side)

24

OBD

7.5 A

On-board diagnosis

25

FR DOOR

25 A

Front power window (right-side)

26

RR DOOR

25 A

Rear power window (right-side)

27

FL DOOR

25 A

Front power window (left-side)

28

RL DOOR

25 A

Rear power window (left-side)

29

FR WASH

25 A

Windshield wipers and washer

30

RR WIP

15 A

Windshield wipers and washer

31

RR WASH

20 A

Windshield wipers and washer

32

FR WIP

30 A

Windshield wipers and washer

33

ECU IG2

10 A

Starter system, intuitive parking assistsensor, AWD system

34

GAUGE NO. 2

7.5 A

Starter system

35

RH S-HTR

15 A

Seat heater (right-side)

36

LH S-HTR

15 A

Seat heater (left-side)

530

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Luggage compartment (type A fuse box)

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

1

DCDC-S

7.5 A

Hybrid system

2

CAPACITOR

10 A

Hybrid system

■ Luggage compartment (type B fuse box) 4

Ampere

Maintenance and care

Fuse

Circuit

1

MAIN

180 A

All electrical components

2

RR-B

50 A

CAPACITOR, DCDC-S

3

EPS

80 A

Electric power steering system

531

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced ● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may

need replacement. (P. 536)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuit

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

CAUTION ■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE ■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

532

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Headlight aim ■ Removing the engine compartment cover P. 478 ■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts Vehicles with discharge headlights Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B

Vehicles with LED headlights Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B

4

533

Maintenance and care

■ Before checking the headlight aim STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed. STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground. STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat. STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adjusting the headlight aim Vehicles with discharge headlights STEP 1

Turn bolt A in either direction using a Phillips-head screwdriver. Remember the turning direction and the number of turns in mind.

STEP 2

Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

Vehicles with LED headlights STEP 1

Turn bolt A in either direction using a Phillips-head screwdriver. Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.

534

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

4

Maintenance and care 535

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Preparing for light bulb replacement Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 639) ■ Remove the engine compartment covers P. 478 ■ Turning off the power back door main switch (if equipped) P. 66 ■ Front bulb locations Halogen headlights

Parking light

Front side marker light Front turn signal light

536

Headlight high beam Headlight low beam

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Discharge headlights Parking light

Front side marker light Front turn signal light

4

Daytime running light

Headlight high beam

Front side marker light Front turn signal light

Parking light 537

Maintenance and care

LED headlights

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear bulb locations Tail light

Tail light

Back-up light Rear side marker light

Rear turn signal light

Replacing light bulbs ■ Daytime running lights (discharge headlights) Turn the bulb base counterclockSTEP 1 wise.

538

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

■ Headlight high beams (halogen headlights) STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs: Left side Move the fuse box.

4

Move the washer fluid filter opening.

539

Maintenance and care

Right side

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 3

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

■ Headlight high beams (LED headlights) Turn the cover counterclockwise STEP 1 and remove it.

STEP 2

540

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

■ Headlight low beams (halogen headlights) Turn the bulb base counterclockSTEP 1 wise.

4

Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

541

Maintenance and care

STEP 2

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Parking lights (halogen headlights and discharge headlights) STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs: Left side Move the fuse box.

Right side Move the washer fluid filter opening.

STEP 2

542

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

■ Parking lights (LED headlights) STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs: Left side Move the fuse box.

4

Move the washer fluid filter opening.

543

Maintenance and care

Right side

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.

■ Front turn signal lights STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs: Left side Move the fuse box.

544

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Right side Move the washer fluid filter opening.

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

4

Remove the light bulb.

Maintenance and care

STEP 3

545

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front side marker lights (halogen headlights and discharge headlights) STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs: Left side Move the fuse box.

Right side Move the washer fluid filter opening.

STEP 2

546

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.

■ Front side marker lights (LED headlights) STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs: Left side Move the fuse box.

4

Move the washer fluid filter opening.

547

Maintenance and care

Right side

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.

■ Rear turn signal and tail lights STEP 1

Remove the access hole cover. Use a flathead wrapped in a cloth.

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Tail light Rear turn signal light

548

screwdriver

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb. Tail light Rear turn signal light

■ Rear side marker lights (right side) Remove the bolts using a PhillipsSTEP 1 head screwdriver and remove the clip.

4

STEP 2

Maintenance and care

Removing the clip Installing the clip

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

549

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.

■ Rear side marker lights (left side) STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Remove the light bulb.

■ Tail and back-up lights STEP 1

Remove the access hole cover. Use a flathead wrapped in a cloth.

550

screwdriver

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Tail light Back-up light

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb. Tail light Back-up light

● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs) ● Front fog lights ● Side turn signal lights ● Stop lights ● High mounted stoplight ● License plate lights

551

4

Maintenance and care

■ Lights other than the above If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Discharge headlights

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored. ■ LED light bulbs

The headlight low beams, side turn signal lights, stop lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced. ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. ● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. ● Water has built up inside the headlight.

552

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION ■ Replacing light bulbs ● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning

off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by

the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may

result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped) ● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light

bulbs).

● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights

are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock. connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

553

Maintenance and care

● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs,

4

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

554

When trouble arises

5 5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers .............. 556 If your vehicle needs to be towed ................................ 557 If you think something is wrong .................................. 563 Event data recorder.............. 564 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ................................. 566 If a warning message is displayed................................. 575 If you have a flat tire............... 596 If the hybrid system will not start................................... 610 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ......................... 612 If you lose your keys ............... 613 If the electronic key does not operate properly............ 614 If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged ........... 617 If your vehicle overheats ..... 620 If the vehicle becomes stuck........................................ 625

555

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not operating.

556

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flatbed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your hybrid transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing. ● The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move. ● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. Emergency towing

557

5

When trouble arises

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

5-1. Essential information

Installing towing eyelets STEP 1

Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.

STEP 2

Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

STEP 3

Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

558

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck From the front (2WD models) Release the parking brake.

5

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

559

When trouble arises

From the front (AWD models)

5-1. Essential information

From the rear Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

Using a flatbed truck If your Lexus is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

560

5-1. Essential information

■ Before emergency towing STEP 1 Release the parking brake. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N. STEP 3 Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON

(hybrid system operating) mode. ■ Emergency towing eyelet location

P. 597

CAUTION ■ Caution while towing ● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.

● If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not

function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

5

When trouble arises 561

5-1. Essential information

NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the hybrid transmission when towing using

a wheel-lift type truck

2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with the ground. ■ To prevent damaging the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. ■ To prevent body damage when towing using a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

562

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Visible symptoms ● Fluid leaks under the vehicle. (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal. ■ Audible symptoms ● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system ■ Operational symptoms ● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough ● Appreciable loss of power

5

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking. ● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

563

When trouble arises

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road.

5-1. Essential information

Event data recorder Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or near crash event. In a crash or a near crash event The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or near crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information: ● Engine speed ● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not ● Vehicle speed ● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed ● Position of the hybrid transmission shift lever ● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not ● Driver's seat position ● SRS airbag deployment data ● SRS airbag system diagnostic data ● Front passenger’s occupant classification The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

564

5-1. Essential information

Disclosure of the data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: ● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained ● Officially requested to by the police or other authorities ● Necessary, for use as a defense for Lexus in a law suit ● Ordered to by a court of law However, if necessary Lexus will: ● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance ● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and that only when deemed necessary ● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes 5

When trouble arises 565

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* • Low brake fluid (U.S.A.) • Malfunction in the brake system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not (Canada) released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer P. 581

Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light

Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

566

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning light

Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: (U.S.A.) • The hybrid system; (Canada) • The electronic engine control system; • The electronic throttle control system; or • The emission control system SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; • The front passenger occupant classification system; or • The seat belt pretensioner system ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; or (Canada) • The brake assist system (U.S.A.)

5

Electric power steering system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

567

When trouble arises

Brake system warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The regenerative brake system; or • The electronically controlled brake system

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system (The warning light may go off after the correction procedure is performed. This indicates that the system has returned to normal. P. 581)

Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off. Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Open door warning light Check that all the doors are (warning buzzer)*1 Indicates that one or more of closed. the doors is not fully closed. Low fuel level warning light Indicates remaining fuel is Refuel the vehicle. approximately 2.7 gal. (10.1 L, 2.2 Imp. gal.) or less

(On the instrument panel)

(On the center panel)

568

Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Fasten the seat belt. Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

Correction procedure

P. 575

Tire pressure warning light When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure

Adjust the tire inflation pressure.

When the light comes on after flashing for 1 minute: Have the system checked by Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer. sure warning system

*1: Open door warning buzzer: The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). (P. 581)

5

*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

569

When trouble arises

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 122) ■ Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and warning

buzzer

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection

sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the

warning light may not operate properly.

■ Electric power steering system warning light

When the voltage is low or drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on. ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

Check that the fuel tank cap is not loose. If it is, tighten the cap securely. The lamp will go off after several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

570

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). ■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes. ■ If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used ● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-

tered in the tire pressure warning computer

● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting ● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:

5

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle ● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed ● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or

wheel housings

● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire

pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used ● If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception ● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the

luggage compartment

571

When trouble arises

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after flashing frequently for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after flashing frequently for 1 minute when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization

The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features P. 656)

CAUTION ■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate it using more force than usual. ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-

ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could

lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

572

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION ■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

573

5

When trouble arises

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE ■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

574

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning message

5

Details

When trouble arises

Indicates the following: • The brake fluid level is low; or, • The brake system is malfunctioning. A buzzer also sounds. Indicates a malfunction in: • The regenerative brake system; or, • The electronically controlled brake system

575

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning message

Details

Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system

576

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning message

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system

(AWD models)

Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system 5

(If equipped)

577

When trouble arises

Indicates a malfunction in the electronically modulated air suspension system

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front lighting system

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlight system (Flashes) (If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake light system

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system

(If equipped)

578

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist The site of the malfunction is flashing. (If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the active stabilizer suspension system (If equipped)

(Flashes) or

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system (If equipped) 579

5

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the “POWER” switch off and then turn it to ON mode again to reset the cruise control system.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; • The front passenger occupant classification system; or, • The seat belt pretensioner system Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; or, • The brake assist system

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

580

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off. Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

Make sure that all the doors are closed.

Indicates that the hood is not fully closed If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indicate that the hood is not yet fully closed.

Close the hood.

5

When trouble arises 581

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details Indicates that the back door is not fully closed If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indicate that the back door is not yet fully closed.

(Flashes) (If equipped)

Correction procedure

Close the back door.

Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “POWER” Close the moon roof. switch off, and the driver's door open) Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),

Release the parking brake.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged. Indicates that the washer Add washer fluid. fluid level is low

582

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed

(U.S.A. only)

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) Check the engine oil, and after the engine oil is change if necessary. changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset.) Have the engine oil and oil filter checked and changed by your Lexus dealer.

Indicates that the precollision safety system is not currently functional because the grille or the sensor is dirty. This message also appears when the precollision system is not functional due to overheating.

Check the grille and the sensor and clean them if they are dirty. In case of overheating, the system will become functional once the system cools down.

(U.S.A. only)

(If equipped)

583

5

When trouble arises

Indicates that the engine oil and oil filter should be changed

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice A buzzer also sounds. The site of the malfunction and the vehicle image are flashing.

Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice A buzzer also sounds.

Clean the sensor.

Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance A buzzer also sounds.

• Switch driving mode to normal. • If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to a mode other than AUTO or high speed wiper operation.

(Flashes)

Correction procedure

(If equipped)

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

584

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode) At the same time,

(Flashes) (If equipped)

Correction procedure

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

will appear on the head-up display (the image flashes).

Stop and check. (P. 620)

Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated A buzzer also sounds.

Stop and check. (P. 620)

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.7 gal. (10.1 L, 2.2 Imp. gal.) or less

Refuel the vehicle.

5

When trouble arises

Indicates that the engine has overheated A buzzer also sounds.

585

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

586

Details

Correction procedure

• If a buzzer sounds intermittently, stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the shift lever to P to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery). • If a buzzer sounds continuously, immediately Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) stop the vehicle in a safe is low. place. Turn the “POWER” switch off and then to ON mode to restart the hybrid system. Ensuring the shift lever is in P, charge the hybrid battery (traction battery). Indicates that the driver’s door is opened when the hybrid transmission is out Shift the shift lever to P. of P with the hybrid system on.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Messages displayed when refueling The following messages are displayed after the fuel filler door opener is pressed. If the messages do not change or are displayed continuously, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. Message

Details Preparing the vehicle for refueling. Wait a moment.

You may commence refueling. Finish refueling within 30 minutes.

Close the fuel filler door. 5

When trouble arises 587

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off. Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Sounds once

Warning message

 (Flashes)

Correction procedure

The electronic key Confirm the locais not detected when an attempt tion of the elecis made to start tronic key. the hybrid system. The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other Bring the electhan the driver's door was opened tronic key back and closed while into the vehicle. the “POWER” switch was in a mode other than off.

Sounds Sounds once 3 times (Flashes)

588

Details

The driver's door was opened and closed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle, the shift lever was in P and the “POWER” switch was not turned off.

Turn the “POWER” switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Warning message

Sounds Sounds once once (Displayed alternately)

Details

Correction procedure

An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the “POWER” switch off.

Turn the “POWER” switch off and lock the doors again.

(Flashes)

Sounds once



Continuous

 (Flashes)

The driver’s door was opened when the shift lever was Shift the shift lever not in P and the to P. “POWER” switch was not turned off.

589

5

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to start the hybrid system without the electronic key being present, or the Confirm that the electronic key was electronic key is not functioning inside the vehicle. normally. An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Warning message

Con- Continuous tinuous (Displayed alternately) (Flashes)

590

Details

Correction procedure

The driver's door was opened and • Shift the shift closed while the electronic key was lever to P. not in the vehicle, • Bring the electhe shift lever was tronic key back not in P and the into the vehicle. “POWER” switch was not turned off.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart access system with pushbutton start while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle. Sounds Cononce tinuous (Flashes)

Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

5

When trouble arises

An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door by pulling on the outside door handle with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.

591

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Sounds once

Warning message

 (Flashes)

Sounds once

 (Flashes)

592

Details

Correction procedure

• When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the “POWER” switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle. • The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the “POWER” switch was pressed two consecutive times.

Touch the electronic key to the “POWER” switch while depressing the brake pedal.

An attempt was made to start the Shift the shift lever hybrid system to P and start the with the shift lever hybrid system. in an incorrect position.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Sounds once

Warning message

 (Flashes)





Details

Correction procedure

To turn off the hybrid system, An attempt was made to turn the first shift the shift “POWER” switch lever to P and off when the shift then turn the lever was not in P. “POWER” switch off. Next time when starting the hybrid system, increase Power was turned the hybrid system speed slightly and off due to the automatic power maintain that level off function. for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12volt battery. 5



Replace the elecThe electronic key tronic key battery. has a low battery. (P. 515)

593

When trouble arises

Sounds once

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer

Sounds once

Warning message

 (Flashes)

Sounds once

 (Flashes)

594

Details

Correction procedure

The driver's door was opened and closed with the “POWER” switch turned off and then the “POWER” switch was put in ACCESSORY mode twice without the hybrid system being started.

Press the “POWER” switch while depressing the brake pedal.

During an hybrid system starting procedure in the event that the electronic key was not functioning properly (P. 614), the “POWER” switch was touched with the electronic key.

Press the “POWER” switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.

The steering lock could not be released within 3 seconds of the “POWER” switch being pressed.

Press the “POWER” switch while depressing the brake pedal and moving the steering wheel left and right.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode

In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases: ● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the

vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed ● Immediately after cruise control speed is set ● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed ■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (P. 479)

5

When trouble arises 595

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the shift lever to P. ● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension: Turn off the height control. (P. 242) ● Stop the hybrid system. ● Turn on the emergency flashers.

596

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools Vehicles with a compact spare tire Spare tire cover

Jack handle Wrench Tool bag Towing eyelet

Jack

Spare tire

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire Spare tire cover

Jack handle Wrench Tool bag

5

Towing eyelet

When trouble arises

Jack

Spare tire

597

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack Vehicles with a compact spare tire STEP 1

Pull the lever upward to fold back the front part of the deck board.

STEP 2

Pull the folded deck board upright.

STEP 3

Pull on the attached hook to extend the string.

598

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

Use the hook to secure the deck board as shown in the illustration.

STEP 5

Remove the jack after removing the hook.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire STEP 1

Pull the lever upward to fold back the front part of the deck board. 5

Pull on the attached hook to extend the string.

599

When trouble arises

STEP 2

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 3

Use the hook to secure the deck board as shown in the illustration.

STEP 4

Remove the jack after removing the hook.

600

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire Lift up the deck board. (See “Taking out the jack” for details.) Remove the spare tire cover. STEP 2 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. Vehicles with a compact spare tire STEP 1

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire

5

When trouble arises 601

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire STEP 1

Chock the tires. Flat tire Lefthand side Front Righthand side Lefthand side Rear Righthand side

STEP 2

STEP 3

602

Wheel chock positions Behind the rear righthand side tire Behind the rear lefthand side tire In front of the front righthand side tire In front of the front lefthand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

STEP 5

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

5

When trouble arises 603

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

STEP 1

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount. Vehicles with a compact spare tire Tighten the nuts until the tapered Tapered portion portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

STEP 2

Disc wheel seat

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire Washer

Wheel nut Disc wheel

604

Turn the nuts until the washers come into contact with the wheel.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Lower the vehicle.

STEP 3

Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

STEP 4

Tightening torque: 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

STEP 5

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

■ The compact spare tire ● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

5

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

When trouble arises

on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency. (P. 637)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

605

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires: STEP 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire. STEP 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-

cle. STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system (if equipped) must be reset. (P. 497)

CAUTION ■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and

removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. ● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the

jack.

● Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. ● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. ● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension: Be sure to turn off the

height control and stop the hybrid system.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

606

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION ■ Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury: ● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the

vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5

kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

● When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed

for that wheel.

● If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt

holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ When using the compact spare tire ● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use

with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously. ● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

607

When trouble arises

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

5

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION ■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: ● ABS & Brake assist ● VSC ● TRAC ● VDIM ● Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) ● Navigation system (if equipped) ● Cruise control (if equipped) ● Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) ● Electronically modulated air suspension (if equipped) ● Pre-Collision System (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may even negatively affect the drive-train components: ● AWD system (if equipped) ■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

608

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE ■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. ■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the

vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. ■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. ■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. 5

When trouble arises 609

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the hybrid system will not start Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

■ The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (P. 166) One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 615) ● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 115) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. ● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (P. 611) ■ The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 617) ● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. ■ The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 617) Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

610

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Emergency start function When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the “POWER” switch is functioning normally: Set the parking brake. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P. STEP 3 Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode. STEP 4 Press and hold the “POWER” switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. STEP 1

5

When trouble arises 611

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

STEP 5

Set the parking brake. Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode. Depress the brake pedal. Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

Press the shift lock override button. The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

612

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

5

When trouble arises 613

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 51) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the side doors and key linked functions Use the mechanical key (P. 42) in order to perform the following operations (driver’s door only): Locks all the doors Closes the windows and moon roof (turn and hold) Unlocks the door Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)

614

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Changing “POWER” switch modes and starting the hybrid system STEP 1 STEP 2

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal. Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the “POWER” switch. If any of the doors is opened or closed while the key is being touched to the switch, an alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key.

To change “POWER” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “POWER” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 167) To start the hybrid system: Press the “POWER” switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, keeping the brake pedal depressed. In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer.

5

STEP 3

When trouble arises

615

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P and press the “POWER” switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system. ■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 515)

616

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. STEP 1

Open the hood and remove the engine compartment covers. (P. 478)

STEP 2

Remove the fuse box cover and open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.

STEP 3

5

When trouble arises

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure: Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting terminal on your vehicle Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

617

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration. STEP 4 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. STEP 5 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “POWER” switch off. STEP 6 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the “POWER” switch to ON mode. STEP 7 Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not comes on, contact your Lexus dealer. STEP 8 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a

low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged ● The power back door must be initialized. (P. 665) ● The hybrid system may not start. (P. 493)

618

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE ■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or belt. ■ Avoiding accidental short-circuits

When connecting jumper cables, observe the following precautions: ● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal. ● Do not allow the ends of the jumper cable used for the “+” terminals to come into

contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the “+” and “-” terminals of the jumper cables to come into contact

with each other.

■ Exclusive jump starting terminal precaution

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.

5

When trouble arises 619

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:

● “ENGINE OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display: The engine may be overheating. ● “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display: A hybrid system component such as the power control unit or an electric motor (traction motor) may be overheating. Follow the correction procedure as described below. Correction procedures ■ If “ENGINE OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system. STEP 2 Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area. If you see steam: Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the hybrid system. If you do not see steam: Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood. STEP 3 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 478) STEP 4 Check to see if the cooling fans are operating. If the fans are operating: Wait until the “ENGINE OVERHEAT” message disappears and then stop the hybrid system. If the fans are not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.

620

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 5

STEP 6

After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Add engine coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 634)

5

621

When trouble arises

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display STEP 1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system. Ensure that the opening for the oil cooler is not blocked by dirt or any other foreign substance.If the opening is not blocked or if the message does not disappear after some time the opening has been cleaned, proceed to STEP 2.

STEP 2 STEP 3

STEP 4

622

Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood. Check if the cooling fans are operating. If the fans are operating: Wait until the “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” message disappears and then stop the hybrid system. If the message does not disappear, call your Lexus dealer. If the fans are not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer. After the hybrid system has cooled down, check the power control unit coolant level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 5

Add power control unit coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant is unavailable. (P. 634)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Overheating

The following symptoms may occur when your vehicle is overheating: ● Hybrid system output decreases. ● Steam comes out from the engine area.

CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle ● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the

● Check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the READY indicator are

off.

● For vehicles with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline engine auto-

matically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to operate. Do not touch or approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans. Doing so may lead to fingers, clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in injury.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.

Serious injuries, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

623

When trouble arises

steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injuries such as burns.

5

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE ■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power control unit coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

624

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire. Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires to help provide traction. Restart the hybrid system. Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle. Turn off the TRAC and VSC systems if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. ( P. 254)

CAUTION ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE ■ To avoid damage to the hybrid transmission and other components ● Avoid spinning the wheels. ● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi-

cle may require towing to be freed.

625

When trouble arises

■ When shifting the shift lever

5

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

626

Vehicle specifications

6 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 628 Fuel information..................... 640 Tire information...................... 643 6-2. Customization Customizable features ........ 656 6-3. Initialization Items to initialize .................... 665

627

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight Overall length

187.8 in. (4770 mm)

Overall width

74.2 in. (1885 mm)

Overall height *1

66.3 in. (1685 mm)*2 66.7 in. (1695 mm)*3 67.7 in. (1720 mm)*4 66.5 in. (1690 mm)*5 67.9 in. (1725 mm)*6

Wheelbase

107.9 in. (2740 mm)

Tread

Front

64.2 in. (1630 mm)

Rear

63.8 in. (1620 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)

825 lb. (370 kg)

Towing capacity *7 (Trailer weight + cargo)

3500 lb. (1588 kg)

*1: *2 : *3 : *4: *5 : *6 : *7:

628

Unladen vehicles Vehicles without roof antenna and roof rails Vehicles with roof antenna but without electronically modulated air suspension Vehicles with roof rails but without electronically modulated air suspension Vehicles with roof antenna and electronically modulated air suspension Vehicles with roof rails and electronically modulated air suspension AWD models with towing package

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. On some models, this number is also stamped under the front passenger seat.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

6

629

Vehicle specifications

■ Engine number and electric motor (traction motor) number The numbers are stamped on the locations shown in the illustration.

6-1. Specifications

Engine Model

2GR-FXE

Type

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.70 3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)

Displacement

210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Fuel Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating

91 (Research octane number 96) or higher

Fuel tank capacity

17.1 gal. (65 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)

Electric motor (Traction motor) Front Type

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output

123 kW

Maximum torque

247 ft•lbf (335 N•m, 34.2 kgf•m)

Rear (AWD models) Type

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output

50 kW

Maximum torque

103 ft•lbf (139 N•m, 14.2 kgf•m)

630

6-1. Specifications

Hybrid battery (Traction battery) Type

Nickel-metal hydride battery

Voltage

9.6 V/module

Capacity

6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity

30 modules

Overall voltage

288 V

6

Vehicle specifications 631

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system Oil capacity Drain and refill (Reference) With filter

6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.3 Imp. qt.)

Without filter

6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)

■ Engine oil selection “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

632

6-1. Specifications

How to read oil container label: The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

6

Vehicle specifications 633

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system Capacity Gasoline engine Power control unit

Coolant type

12.0 qt. (11.4 L, 10.0 Imp. qt.) 12.3 qt. (11.7 L, 10.3 Imp. qt.)* 2.0 qt. (1.9 L, 1.7 Imp. qt.) Use either of the following: • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone.

*: With towing package Ignition system Spark plug Make Gap

DENSO FK20HR11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE ■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

634

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system 12-volt battery Open voltage* at 68F (20C):

12.6 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 12.0 V Discharged (*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all the lights are turned off)

Charging rates

5 A max.

Hybrid Transaxle Fluid capacity*

Front 4.9 qt. (4.6 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.)

Rear 1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp. qt.) Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE ■ Transmission fluid type

635

6

Vehicle specifications

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause ultimately damage to the vehicle’s transmission.

6-1. Specifications

Brakes Pedal clearance *1

3.9 in. (99 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

0.04  0.08 in. (1  2 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel *2

5  8 clicks

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating

*2: Parking

brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf)

Steering Free play

636

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

6-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels Type A Tire size

P235/60R18 102V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)

Tire inflation pressure (recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size

18  7 1/2J, 18  4T (spare)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Type B Tire size

P235/60R18 102V

Tire inflation pressure (recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size

18  7 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

6

Vehicle specifications 637

6-1. Specifications

Type C Tire size

P235/55R19 101V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)

Front and rear tire inflation pressure (recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

19  7 1/2J, 18  4T (spare)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Type D Tire size

P235/55R19 101V

Tire inflation pressure (recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/ h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

19  7 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

638

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Light Bulbs

Bulb No.

W

Type

Headlights High beam (halogen bulbs) Low beam (halogen bulbs) Low/High beam (discharge bulbs) Daytime running lights

9005 H11 D4S 9005

60 55 35 60

A E B A

Front side marker lights

W5W

5

C

Front turn signal lights

WY21W

21

D

Parking lights

W5W

5

C

Tail lights

W5W

5

C

H11

55

E

WY21W

21

D

Back-up lights

921

16

C

Outer foot lights



5

C

Vanity lights



8

C

Front interior lights



5

C

Rear interior lights



8

C

Luggage compartment lights



5

C

Door courtesy lights



5

C

Footwell lights



3.8

C

Front fog lights Rear turn signal lights

Interior

Vehicle specifications

A: B: C: D: E:

6

HB3 halogen bulbs D4S discharge bulbs Wedge base bulbs (clear) Wedge base bulbs (amber) H11 halogen bulbs

639

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is required for optimum engine performance. If 91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. ■ If your engine knocks ● Consult your Lexus dealer. ● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating

or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

640

6-1. Specifications

■ Gasoline quality standards ● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission

levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and

customer satisfaction through better performance.

■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to

avoid build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep

clean intake systems.

■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. ■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline ● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-

tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower

than 87.

6

● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

641

Vehicle specifications

■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

6-1. Specifications

NOTICE ■ Notice on fuel quality ● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged. ● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated

here will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. ■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

642

6-1. Specifications

Tire information Typical tire symbols

Standard tire

Compact spare tire

6

Vehicle specifications

Tire size DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Location of treadwear indicators

(P. 646) (P. 645) (P. 496)

643

6-1. Specifications

Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(P. 500) (P. 637)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

Summer tire or all season tire

(P. 500)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

(P. 605)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

644

6-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that

the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

6

Vehicle specifications 645

6-1. Specifications

Tire size ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) ■ Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter

646

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

647

6

Vehicle specifications

■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width.

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

648

6-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6

Vehicle specifications 649

6-1. Specifications

Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term

Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

650

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by Vehicle maximum load on distributing to each axle its share of the maximum the tire loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

6

Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

651

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

CT

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

652

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

6

Vehicle specifications

653

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall

Test rim

654

)

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2

2 in front

5 through 10

3

2 in front, 1 in second seat

5

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

7

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

11 through 15

16 through 20

655

6

Vehicle specifications

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

6-2. Customization

Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. Programming of these preferences can be performed by your Lexus dealer. It is also possible to customize certain vehicle features yourself using the multi-information switches and the navigation screen. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Customizing vehicle features It is possible to customize certain vehicle features using the multi-information switches. * When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set. STEP 1

STEP 2

656

Press and hold the menu switch of the multi-information switches to display customize mode.

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards to select the item to be customized. Press the “ENTER” switch to confirm.

6-2. Customization

STEP 3

Press the “ENTER” switch upwards or downwards to select the desired setting for the item being customized. Press the “ENTER” switch to confirm.

When customization is completed, press the menu switch to clear the customization screen. *: For instructions on customizing vehicle features using the navigation screen, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

6

Vehicle specifications 657

6-2. Customization

Customizable Features Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the screen of the navigation system Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the multi-information switches Vehicles without a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the multi-information switches Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available Item

Door lock (P. 61, 614)

658

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Driver's door unlocked All doors Unlocking using in one step, unlocked all doors a key in one step unlocked in two steps

O





O

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Off

On

O



O

O

Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors

On

Off

O



O

O

6-2. Customization

Item

Door lock (P. 61, 614)

Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control (P. 46, 57)

Customized setting

Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors

On

Off

O



O

O

Opening driver's door unlocks all doors

Off

On

O



O

O

O



O

O

O



O

O

O



O

O

Operation signal (buzzer) Operation signal (emergency flashers)

7

On

Off 1 to 6 Off

Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked

60 seconds

Smart door unlocking

Driver’s door

All the doors

O



O

O

On

Off

O



O

O

Smart access system with push-button start

Off 30 seconds 120 seconds

659

6

Vehicle specifications

Smart access system with push-button start (P. 46)

Function

Default setting

6-2. Customization

Item

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Driver's door unlocked Wireless All doors remote con- Unlocking oper- in one step, unlocked all doors trol ation in one step unlocked (P. 57) in two steps

O



O

O

O



O

O

Off

Automatic light control system (P. 200)

660

Time elapsed before the headlights turn off

30 seconds

60 seconds

Light sensor sensitivity

Standard

-2 to 2

O



O

O

Daytime running light system

On

Off

O



O

O

Automatic high beam system

On

Off







O

90 seconds

6-2. Customization

Item

Function

Default setting

Customized setting Off

Time elapsed before the inte- 15 seconds rior lights turn off

7.5 seconds

O



O

O

O



O

O

30 seconds Off

Time elapsed before the exte- 15 seconds rior lights turn off Illumination (P. 418)

7.5 seconds 30 seconds

Standard

-2 to 2

O





O

Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used for brightening the meter lights etc.

Standard

-2 to 2

O





O

Footwell lights

On

Off







O

Outer foot lights

On

Off







O

661

6

Vehicle specifications

Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used for dimming the meter lights etc.

6-2. Customization

Item

Automatic air conditioning system

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Switching between outside air and recirculated air mode linked to “AUTO” switch operation

Auto

Manual

O





O

A/C auto switch operation

Auto

Manual

O





O

-3 to 3

O





O

O



O

O

Exhaust gas senStandard sor sensitivity

Front seats (P. 75)

Driver’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle (on some models)

Full

Multi-information display (P. 189)

Eco Driving Indicator Light

On

Off



O

O

O

Mechanical key linked operation

On

Off







O

Wireless remote control linked operation

Off

On







O

Power windows (P. 103)

662

Off Partial

6-2. Customization

Item

Moon roof (P. 106)

Intuitive parking assist (P. 235)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Mechanical key linked operation

On

Off







O

Wireless remote control linked operation*

Off

On







O

Buzzer volume

3

1 to 5

O





O

Detection distance of the rear center sensor

Far

Near

O





O

O





O

Display setting (when intuitive All sensors No sensors parking assistdisplayed displayed sensor is operating)

*: This function cannot be customized unless power window operation using the wireless remote control is enabled.

6

Vehicle specifications 663

6-2. Customization

Multi-information display (P. 189) Settings that can be changed using the multi-information switches Available languages Available units

English, French and Spanish miles (MPG), km (km/l), km (l/100 km)

■ In the following situations, customize mode will automatically be turned off. ● A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is displayed. ● The “POWER” switch is turned off. ● The vehicle begins to move while the customize mode screen is displayed.

CAUTION ■ Cautions during customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE ■ During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.

664

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the 12-volt battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.

Item

When to initialize

Reference

Power back door

• After reconnecting or changing the 12-volt battery • After changing a fuse

P. 64

Engine oil maintenance data

After changing engine oil

P. 481

Tire pressure warning system

• When changing tire pressure (such as when changing traveling speed, load weight, etc.) • When changing the tire size

P. 497

6

Vehicle specifications 665

6-3. Initialization

666

For owners

7 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..................... 668 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ............................. 669

667

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

668

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité ● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec votre cou ou glisser de votre épaule. ● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège. ● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

7

For owners 669

Guide confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs) Si la sangle diagonale gêne la personne au niveau du cou, utilisez le guide confort de la ceinture de sécurité. ÉTAPE 1

Sortez le guide confort de sa poche.

ÉTAPE 2

Engagez la ceinture dans le guide. Le cordon élastique doit passer sous la ceinture de sécurité.

ÉTAPE 3

670

Bouclez la ceinture de sécurité, puis positionnez-la et lâchez-la.

Entretien et soin ■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

ATTENTION ■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité

Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.

7

For owners 671

672

Index Abbreviation list .................... 674 Alphabetical index................. 676 What to do if... ....................... 686

For details of equipment related to the navigation system, such as the rear entertainment system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

673

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING

2WD

2 Wheel Drive

A/C

Air Conditioning

ABS

Anti-lock Brake System

AFS

Adaptive Front-lighting System

AI-SHIFT

Artificial Intelligence Shift control

ALR

Automatic Locking Retractor

AWD

All Wheel Drive

CAL

Calibration

CRS

Child Restraint System

ECO

Economy/Ecology

ECU

Electronic Control Unit

EDR

Event Data Recorder

ELR

Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS

Electric Power Steering

GAWR

Gross Axle Weight Ratings

GCWR

Gross Combination Weight Rating

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M

Emission Inspection and Maintenance

LATCH

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED

Light Emitting Diode

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

M+S

Mud and Snow

MTBE

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

OBD

On Board Diagnostics

PCS

Pre-Collision System

674

Abbreviation list

ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING

SRS

Supplemental Restraint System

TIN

Tire Identification Number

TPMS

Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC

Traction Control

VDIM

Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number

VSC

Vehicle Stability Control

675

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index A A/C Air conditioning filter .........................512 Automatic air conditioning system..................................................296 ABS.............................................................252 ACCESSORY mode .......................... 166 Active stabilizer suspension system.....................................................252 Adaptive front lighting system ........202 AFS .............................................................202 Air conditioning system .....................296 Air conditioning filter .........................512 Automatic air conditioning system..................................................296 Airbags Airbag operating conditions..........125 Airbag precautions for your child.........................................................129 Airbag warning light ........................567 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions.............................................126 Curtain shield airbag precautions .........................................129 Front passenger occupant classification system........................134 General airbag precautions ..........129 Locations of airbags........................... 122 Modification and disposal of airbags...................................................133 Proper driving posture .......... 120, 129 Side airbag operating conditions.............................................126 Side airbag precautions ...................129 SRS airbags ............................................ 122

676

Alarm............................................................ 117 Antenna......................................................316 Anti-lock brake system...................... 252 Armrest ....................................................440 Audio input..............................................359 Audio system Antenna....................................................316 Audio input........................................... 359 AUX adapter ...................................... 359 CD player/changer...........................319 iPod® player ....................................... 339 MP3/WMA disc................................329 Optimal use ......................................... 356 Portable audio device..................... 359 Radio .......................................................309 Steering wheel audio switch..........361 USB memory player ....................... 352 Automatic air conditioning system Air conditioning filter......................... 512 Automatic air conditioning system.................................................. 296 Automatic headlight leveling system ....................................................204 Automatic high beam system..........205 Automatic light control system.......200 AUX adapter .........................................359

Alphabetical index

B Back door Back door .................................................64 Wireless remote control....................57 Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs .......................536 Wattage .................................................639 Battery Checking...............................................489 Hybrid battery (traction battery) ................................29 If the vehicle has a discharged 12-volt battery.................................... 617 Preparing and checking before winter.....................................274 Bluetooth® audio..................................372 Bluetooth® phone............................... 384 Brake Fluid..........................................................636 Parking brake....................................... 180 Brake assist..............................................252 Break-in tips ............................................. 157 C Card key ....................................................... 41 Care Exterior ...................................................458 Interior.......................................................461 Seat belts ............................................... 462 Cargo capacity ......................................273 Cargo hooks ...........................................443 CD changer CD ..............................................................319 MP3 ......................................................... 329 WMA disc ............................................ 329 CD player..................................................319 Chains........................................................274

Child restraint system Booster seats, definition .................. 139 Booster seats, installation ............... 143 Convertible seats, definition.......... 139 Convertible seats, installation....... 143 Front passenger occupant classification system....................... 134 Infant seats, definition........................ 139 Infant seats, installation ..................... 143 Installing CRS with LATCH system ....................................................144 Installing CRS with seat belts........ 146 Installing CRS with top tether straps .....................................................150 Child safety Airbag precautions.............................129 Back door precautions......................64 Child restraint system....................... 139 Child-protectors ...................................62 How your child should wear the seat belt ..........................................93 Installing child restraints................... 143 Moon roof precautions....................109 Power window lock switch............103 Power window precautions ..........105 Removed electronic key battery precautions......................................... 516 Seat belt comfort guide .....................90 Seat belt extender precautions......96 Seat belt precautions ..........................94 Seat heater precautions..................439 12-volt battery precautions........................... 465, 494 Child-protectors...................................... 62

677

Alphabetical index

Cleaning Exterior ...................................................458 Interior.......................................................461 Seat belts................................................ 462 Clock .........................................................432 Coat hooks............................................... 441 Compass ..................................................453 Condenser ............................................. 485 Console box ...........................................426 Cooling system Hybrid system overheating..........620 Cornering assist sensors ...................235 Cruise control Cruise control .....................................220 Dynamic radar cruise control ..... 224 Cup holders ............................................424 Curtain shield airbags.......................... 122 Customizable features .......................656

D Daytime running light system ..........203 Defogger Rear window........................................303 Side mirrors........................................... 100 Dimensions..............................................628 Dinghy towing........................................292 Display Energy flow.............................................. 34 Multi-information display................ 189 Trip information....................................192 Warning message.............................575 Do-it-yourself maintenance ...............471 Door courtesy lights Door courtesy lights.......................... 418 Wattage..................................................639

678

Door lock Back door .................................................64 Side door.................................................... 61 Wireless remote control ...................57 Door pockets ......................................... 423 Doors Back door .................................................64 Door lock ..................................46, 57, 61 Door windows......................................103 Power back door..................................64 Side door.................................................... 61 Side mirrors............................................100 Driver's seat belt reminder light.....568 Driving Break-in tips........................................... 157 Correct posture...................................120 Procedures.............................................156 Utility vehicle precautions..............264 Winter driving tips.............................274 Driving position memory...................... 84

E Electric power steering...................... 252 Electronic features control................ 189 Electronic key If the electronic key does not operate properly.............................. 614 Electronically modulated air suspension............................................ 242 Emergency flashers Switch......................................................556 Emergency, in case of If the back door opener is inoperative ........................................... 68 If the electronic key does not operate properly.............................. 614

Alphabetical index

If the hybrid system will not start .................................................610 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.....................................612 If the vehicle has a discharged 12-volt battery.................................... 617 If a warning buzzer sounds..........566 If a warning light turns on ..............566 If a warning message is displayed............................................ 575 If you have a flat tire ........................596 If you lose your keys ..........................613 If you think something is wrong...................................................563 If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 625 If your vehicle needs to be towed................................................... 557 If your vehicle overheats................620 Engine Accessory mode .................................166 Compartment ......................................477 Hood ........................................................474 How to start the hybrid system ....166 Identification number....................... 629 If the hybrid system will not start .................................................610 Ignition switch........................................166 Overheating.........................................620 “POWER” switch................................166 Engine compartment cover..............478 Engine/power control unit coolant Capacity................................................. 634 Checking...............................................483 Preparing and checking before winter.....................................274

Engine oil Capacity .................................................632 Checking ...............................................479 Preparing and checking before winter .................................... 274 Engine oil maintenance data............. 481 EPS .............................................................252 EV drive mode.........................................174 Event data recorder ............................564

F

Floor mat ..................................................442 Fluid Brake....................................................... 636 Washer ...................................................487 Fog lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 536 Switch.......................................................... 211 Wattage................................................. 639 Footwell light ........................................... 418 Front fog lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 536 Switch.......................................................... 211 Wattage................................................. 639 Front passenger occupant classification system .......................... 134 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light..................................... 568 Front seats Adjustment...............................................75 Driving position memory..................84 Flattening seatbacks............................ 76 Front side marker light ...................... 200 Replacing light bulbs....................... 536 Wattage................................................. 639

679

Alphabetical index

Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................536 Wattage..................................................639 Fuel Capacity.................................................630 Fuel gauge ..............................................182 Information............................................640 Refueling ................................................... 110 Type..........................................................640 Fuel door .....................................................110 Fuel filler door ...........................................110 Fuses ........................................................... 517

Height control Electronically modulated air suspension .........................................242 Hill-start assist control........................ 252 Hood.......................................................... 474 Hooks Cargo.......................................................443 Coat........................................................... 441 Horn..............................................................181 HUD ........................................................... 195 Hybrid system Emergency shut off system............. 30 Energy monitor/consumption screen......................................................34 High voltage components................29 Hybrid system indicator ..................185 “POWER” switch................................166

G Garage door opener .......................... 447 Gauges ...................................................... 182 Glove box ................................................422 H Hands-free system for mobile phone ......................................384 Hazard lights Switch .....................................................556 Head restraints Adjustment ............................................. 87 Head-up display..................................... 195 Headlight aim .........................................534 Headlight cleaner.................................. 219 Headlights Discharge headlight precautions .......................................553 Replacing light bulbs........................536 Switch ......................................................200 Wattage..................................................639 Heaters Seat heaters..........................................438 Side mirrors..........................................303 680

I

I/M test ..................................................... 470 Identification Electric motor ..................................... 629 Engine..................................................... 629 Vehicle.................................................... 629 Ignition switch ..........................................166 Illuminated entry system..................... 418 Immobilizer system.................................115 Indicator lights ........................................ 185 Initialization Items to initialize.................................665 Inside rear view mirror.......................... 99 Interior lights Interior lights ..........................................418 Switch........................................................ 419 Wattage ................................................. 639

Alphabetical index

J

Jack Positioning a floor jack ................... 475 Vehicle-equipped jack...................596 Jack handle ............................................. 596

K Keyless entry..................................................57 Keys Electronic key........................................... 41 If the electronic key does not operate properly..............................614 If you lose your keys ..........................613 Key number............................................... 41 Keyless entry............................................57 Keys............................................................... 41 Mechanical key ......................................42 “POWER” switch................................166 Wireless remote control key...........57 L

Light bulbs Replacing...............................................536 Wattage .................................................639 Lights Door courtesy lights ..........................418 Emergency flasher switch.............556 Fog light switch.......................................211 Hazard light switch...........................556 Headlight switch ................................200 Interior light switch..............................419 Luggage compartment light............67 Outer foot lights...................................418 Overhead courtesy light .................418 Personal light switch..........................419 Replacing light bulbs .......................536 Scuff lights ...............................................418 Shift lever light.......................................418 Turn signal lever................................... 179

Vanity lights ........................................... 431 Wattage................................................. 639 Load capacity......................................... 273 Lock steering column .......................... 169 Luggage compartment lights Switch.......................................................... 67 Wattage................................................. 639 Luggage cover.......................................444 M Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance............471 General maintenance .................... 466 Maintenance data............................. 628 Maintenance requirements ..........464 Meter Instrument panel light control.......183 Meters....................................................... 182 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror.......................99 Side mirror heaters .......................... 303 Side mirrors ...........................................100 Vanity mirrors....................................... 431 Moon roof................................................. 106 MP3 disc ..................................................329 Multi-information display ...................189 Electronic features control.............189 Trip information ....................................192

N Noise from under vehicle.....................20

681

Alphabetical index

O Odometer.................................................183

Oil Engine oil ............................................... 479 Opener Back door................................................. 64 Fuel filler door......................................... 110 Hood........................................................ 474 Outer foot lights Outer foot lights.................................. 418 Wattage..................................................639 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding ....................... 100 Mirror position memory ...................84 Outside temperature display...........433 Overhead console ...............................428 Overhead courtesy lights Overhead courtesy lights .............. 418 Wattage..................................................639 Overheating, Hybrid system ...........620 P

682

Parking assist sensors .........................235 Parking brake..........................................180 Parking lights Replacing light bulbs........................536 Switch ......................................................200 Wattage..................................................639 PCS ............................................................260 Personal lights Switch ........................................................419 Power back door .....................................64 Power easy access system................... 77 Power outlet............................................435 “POWER” switch................................... 166 Power windows ......................................103 Pre-collision system.............................260

R

Radar cruise control............................ 224 Radiator....................................................485 Radio......................................................... 309 Rear seat Folding down ......................................... 80 Seat adjustment.....................................80 Rear seat entertainment system* Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs.......................538 Wattage ................................................. 639 Rear view mirror Compass............................................... 453 Rear view monitor system ................248 Rear window defogger ......................303 Rear window wiper............................... 218 Replacing Electronic key battery.......................515 Fuses.......................................................... 517 Light bulbs ............................................ 536 Tires..........................................................596 Wireless remote control battery ...................................................515 Roof luggage carrier........................... 269 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..........................................668

Alphabetical index

S

Scuff lights .................................................418 Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt .......................90 Automatic locking retractor.............92 Child restraint system installation ............................................143 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts..................................... 462 Emergency locking retractor .........92 How to wear your seat belt.............89 How your child should wear the seat belt.......................................... 93 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use..........................92 Reminder light.....................................568 Seat belt extender................................ 93 Seat belt pretensioners........................ 91 Seat heaters............................................ 438 Seat position memory ........................... 84 Seat ventilators...................................... 438 Seating capacity ....................................273 Seats Adjustment .................................... 75, 80 Adjustment precautions ..................................79, 82 Child seats/child restraint system installation............................143 Cleaning ..................................................461 Flatting seat backs.................................76 Head restraint ........................................ 87 Power easy access system...............77 Properly sitting in the seat...............120 Seat heaters..........................................438 Seat position memory........................ 84 Seat ventilators ...................................438

Service reminder indicators .............185 Shift lever If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .....................................612 Transmission............................................ 171 Shift lever light......................................... 418 Shift lock system..................................... 612 Side airbags...............................................122 Side marker lights Switch...................................................... 200 Side mirror Adjusting and folding........................100 Mirror position memory....................84 Smart access system with push-button start Entry function..........................................46 Starting the hybrid system.............. 166 Spare tire Inflation pressure................................637 Storage location ................................ 596 Spark plug................................................634 Specifications .........................................628 Speech command switch ................. 389 Speedometer .......................................... 182 Steering Column lock release......................... 169 Steering wheel Adjustment............................................... 97 Audio switches..................................... 361 Power easy access system ...............77 Steering wheel position memory..................................................84 Storage feature....................................... 421 Stuck vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck.....625 *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 683

Alphabetical index

Sun visors .................................................430 Sunshades................................................. 107 Switch Display contrast adjustment switch .................................................... 195 Display position adjustment switch .................................................... 195 Driving mode selector switch .......173 Emergency flasher switch .............556 ENTER switch...................................... 189 Fog light switch.......................................211 Hazard light switch...........................556 Head-up display main switch....... 195 Ignition switch........................................166 Light switches......................................200 Menu switch.......................................... 189 Power back door opener ................ 64 Power door lock switch......................61 “POWER” switch ................................166 Power window switch.......................218 Rear window wiper and washer switch ....................................218 Window lock switch ......................... 103 Wiper and washer switch ...............213 T

684

Tail lights Replacing light bulbs........................536 Switch ......................................................200 Wattage..................................................639 Talk switch .............................................. 389 Telephone switch................................. 389 Theft deterrent system Alarm ...........................................................117 Immobilizer system.............................. 115 Theft prevention labels ..........................119 Tire inflation pressure ........................ 505

Tire information Glossary ................................................650 Size........................................................... 646 Tire identification number............. 645 Uniform tire quality grading..........647 Tires Chains......................................................274 Checking............................................... 496 If you have a flat tire .........................596 Inflation pressure ...............................505 Inflation pressure sensor ................497 Information ........................................... 643 Replacing ..............................................596 Rotating tires........................................ 496 Size............................................................637 Snow tires...............................................274 Spare tire ............................................... 597 Tire pressure warning system..................................... 496, 568 Tools...........................................................596 Total load capacity............................... 273 Towing Dinghy towing .....................................292 Emergency towing........................... 557 Trailer towing .......................................278 TRAC ........................................................ 252 Traction control..................................... 252 Trailer towing ............................... 278, 291 Transmission Hybrid transmission............................. 171 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P..................................... 612 S mode ..................................................... 175 Trip information display ...................... 189 Trip meter ................................................. 182

Alphabetical index

Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .......................536 Switch........................................................ 179 Wattage .................................................639 V

Vanity lights Vanity lights............................................431 Wattage .................................................639 Vanity mirrors..........................................431 VDIM .........................................................252 Vehicle dynamics integrated management........................................252 Vehicle identification number .........629 Vehicle stability control......................252 VSC ............................................................252

W Warning buzzers

Brake system.......................................566 Open door ..........................................568 Seat belt reminder ............................568 Warning lights Anti-lock brake system .................. 567 Brake assist system .......................... 567 Brake system.......................................566 Charging system...............................566 Electric power steering.................. 567 Electronic engine control system.................................................. 567 Low fuel level.......................................568 Low tire pressure ..............................568 Malfunction indicator lamp .......... 567 Master warning light........................568 Open door ...........................................568 Pre-collision system......................... 567 Pretensioners ...................................... 567 Seat belt reminder light ..................568

SRS airbags...........................................567 Tire pressure .......................................568 Warning messages ..............................575 Washer Checking ...............................................487 Preparing and checking before winter .................................... 274 Switch.........................................................213 Washing and waxing...........................458 Weight Cargo capacity................................... 273 Load limits ............................................. 273 Weight.................................................... 628 Wheels .......................................................510 Window glasses ....................................103 Window lock switch .............................103 Windows Power windows...................................103 Rear window defogger.................. 303 Washer .....................................................213 Windshield wiper de-icer..................304 Windshield wipers................................. 213 Wireless remote control key Replacing the battery........................515 Wireless remote control....................... 57 WMA disc ...............................................329

685

What to do if...

What to do if... A tire punctures

P. 596 If you have a flat tire

The hybrid system does not start

If the hybrid system will not start P. 115 Immobilizer system P. 617 If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be moved out

P. 612

P. 610

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone P. 620 If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 613

If you lose your keys

The 12-volt battery runs out

P. 617

If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged

P. 64

Side doors Back door

The horn begins to sound

P. 117

Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 625 If the vehicle becomes stuck

The doors cannot be locked

686

P. 61

What to do if...

A warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 566

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

■Warning lights Brake system warning light

or

Malfunction indicator lamp

or P. 566

Brake system warning light P. 567

P. 567

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

P. 568

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light P. 568

“ABS” warning light

or P. 567

Low fuel level warning light

Master warning light with warning message P. 568

P. 568

Electric power steering system warning light P. 567

P. 567

Pre-collision system warning light P. 567

SRS warning light

Open door warning light P. 568

Tire pressure warning light P. 568

Charging system warning light P. 566

687

GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever P. 474

Hood lock release lever P. 474

Fuel tank capacity Fuel type Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill) Engine oil type

688

Back door opener P. 64

Fuel filler door opener P. 110

Fuel filler door P. 110

Tire inflation pressure P. 637

17.1 gal. (65 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.) Unleaded gasoline only

P. 630 P. 637

With filter Without filter

qt. (L, Imp. qt.) 6.4 (6,1, 5,3) 6.0 (5,7, 5.0)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity: SAE0W-20

P. 632

Similar documents